PCS-9613 X Instruction+Manual EN Overseas+General X R3.00

PCS-9613
Differential Relay
Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR Electric Co., Ltd. is dispatched separately from
manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided
to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the
recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual and read relevant chapters carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Health and Safety
The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
PCS-9613 Differential Relay I

Date: 2015-12-01
Preface
Instructions and Warnings
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safe ty
precautions are disregarded.
NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.
DANGER!
NEVER allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
 Earthing
Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.
II PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
Preface
 Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
 Printed circuit board
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
 External circuit
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Input signal of a function block, such as a logic setting, a blocking

signal or a analog comparator signal etc.
Input inversion signal of a function block, such as a logic setting,

a blocking signal or a analog comparator signal etc.
& AND gate: all the input signals are “1”, then the output is “1”
OR gate: anyone the input signals is “1”, then the output is “1”
S Q RS flipflop (static memory): setting input (S), resetting input (R),

R Q output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
PCS-9613 Differential Relay III

Date: 2015-12-01
Preface
t 0
Timer: pickup with delay “t”, dropout without delay
0 t
Timer: pickup without delay, dropout with delay “t”
t1 t2
Timer: pickup with delay “t1”, dropout with delay “t2”
Junction (connection point)
Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and d issemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com
P/N: ZL_PCS-9613_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R3.00
IV PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
The chapter contents are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Management Function
Introduce the management functions (metering, control and recording etc.) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each module of this relay and providing the definition of
pins of each module.
7 Settings
List of all the settings and their ranges and step sizes, together with a brief explanation of each
setting and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through the HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view
through the HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce the configurable function (such as protection function configuration, LED configuration,
binary input configuration and binary output configuration etc.) of this relay.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, the IEC60970 -5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
PCS-9613 Differential Relay V

Date: 2015-12-01
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of th is relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
VI PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1.1 Application.....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Functions .......................................................................................................................1-2
1.3 Features..........................................................................................................................1-3
List of Figures
Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613....................................................................... 1-1
PCS-9613 Differential Relay 1-a

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
The PCS-9613 relay is a differential protection, control and monitoring unit for the feeder line on
solidly grounded system, impedance grounded system, Peterson coil grounded system and
ungrounded system. This relay is suitable for wall surface mounted indoors or outdoors or flush
mounted into a control panel.
This relay can sample the analog values from the traditional instrument transformers, or receive
the sampled values from the electronic current and voltage transformers (via a merging unit). The
binary inputs and outputs of this relay can be configured according to the demands of a practical
engineering through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software, which can meet some
special requirements of protection and control functions.
This relay can fully support the IEC61850 communication protocol and GOOSE function, and can
completely meet the demands of a modern digitalized substation.
The function diagram of this relay is shown in Figure 1.1-1.
Busbar
1
PCS-9613
52
25 79 VTS
3
27 59 49
3
50P 51P 67P 46 46BC 50BF CTS

1
50G 51G 67G 87L MR

1
51SG 67SG FDR

Feeder
FO Channel
87L
3 PCS-9613
Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613
PCS-9613 Differential Relay 1-1

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
1.2 Functions
The functions of this relay include protective functions, management functions and auxiliary testing
functions, and the functions of this relay are listed in the following tables.
 Protective functions
Protective Functions
87L Current differential protection
50P Instantaneous overcurrent protection
51P Time overcurrent protection
67P Directional overcurrent protection
50G Instantaneous zero sequence overcurrent protection
51G Time zero sequence overcurrent protection
67G Directional zero sequence overcurrent protection
51SG Sensitive earth fault protection
67SG Directional sensitive earth fault protection
49 Thermal overload protection
27 Undervoltage protection
59 Overvoltage protection
46 Negative sequence overcurrent protection
46BC Broken conductor protection
50BF Breaker failure Protection
79 Three-pole auto-recloser (Up to 4 shots)
25 Synchronism check function
SOTF Switch onto fault logic
MR Mechanical protection
AI Analog inputs
Voltage and current drift auto adjustment
Self supervision
VTS Voltage transformer supervision
CTS Current transformer supervision
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
 Management functions
Management Functions
Metering
Circuit breaker status monitoring
2 Circuit breaker control
TCS Tripping circuit supervision
Multiple setting groups
Control inputs
1-2 PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
64 protection operation reports

1024 supervision alarm records
1024 control operation records
1024 user operation records
FDR 64 fault and disturbance records
1024 latest SOE records, latest records of the following elements
SOE state changing: operating abnormality alarm elements, supervision
alarm elements, protection elements and binary input elements.
Rear communication ports: Ethernet, RS-485, Printer port
Time synchronization port: RS-485
 Auxiliary testing functions
Auxiliary Testing Functions

Virtual tripping report generation and communication testing
Virtual self-supervision report generation and communication testing
Virtual binary input state change report generation and communication testing
Virtual metering values generation and communication testing
1.3 Features
 This device is based on a 32-bit high performance dual-core processor, internal high speed
bus and intelligent I/O ports, and the hardware is in module design and can be configured
flexibly, featuring interchangeability and easy extension and maintenance.
 Modularized hardware design makes this relay be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified
service person. Various function optional modules can satisfy various situations according to
the different requirements of the users.
 The adoption of 16-bit A/D converter and the dual-channel sampling technology can ensure
the accuracy and reliability of protection sampling and the correctness of protection operation.
It is also provides dedicated current transformers for metering, and ensures the high accuracy
of telemetering with 48-point high speed sampling rate per cycle.
 This device can sample the analog values from the traditional instrument transformers, or
receive the sampled values from the electronic transformers. It can support the protocol
IEC60044-8, IEC61850-9-2 and GOOSE.
 Various algorithms for protection and measurement have been comple ted in this device for
the feature of electronic transformer sampling, such as the error prevention method of
multi-algorithms data anomaly for the digital channels, to realize high accuracy and reliability
under various conditions of network faults or communication interruption.
 This device has powerful GOOSE functions, and the connection and cooperation between
some devices can be realized without using electrical cables, to facilitate the realization of
such functions as simple bus differential protection, overload interlock shedding function and
backup automatic transfer function etc.

Date: 2015-12-01
1 Introduction
 This device has fully realized the technology to integrate six functions into one device:
protection, measurement, control, remote signaling, merging unit function and remote module
functions, to improve the reliability.
 Various methods of GPS time synchronization are supported in this relay, including SNTP,
pulse per second (PPS) and IRIG-B synchronization.
 The protection modules are completely separated from other modules, and are independent
in both hardware and software. The protection functions do not depend on the communication
network, so the failure of communication network will not affect the normal operation of the
protection functions.
 Mature protection configuration, fast speed and high security performance can meet the
practical requirements. Each protective element is independent, so it is very convenient for
whether adopting the selected protective element.
 This device constantly measures and calculates a large amount of analog quantities, such as
phase voltage, phase-to-phase voltage, neutral voltage, phase current, neutral current, active
power, reactive power, power factor and frequency etc.
 The human machine interface (HMI) with a small control module (a 240×128-dot LCD, a 9-key
keypad and 20 LED indicators) on the front panel is very friendly and convenient to the user.
 This device can communicate with a SAS or RTU via different communication intermediates:
Ethernet network, RS-485 serial ports. The communication protocol of this device is optional:
IEC61850, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or ModBus.
 This device can detect the tripping circuit of the circuit breaker and monitor the operation
(close or trip) time of a circuit breaker by checking the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.
 Complete event recording function is provided: 64 latest protection operation reports, 1024
latest supervision records, 1024 latest control operation records, 1024 latest user operation
records and 1024 latest records of time tagged sequence of event (SOE) can be recorded.
 Powerful fault and disturbance recording function is supported: 64 latest fault or disturbance
waves, the duration of a wave recording is configurable.

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2.1 General Specification .................................................................................................2-1

2.1.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Mechanical Specifications ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 Communication Interfaces ............................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.5 Type Test ......................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2 Protective Functions...................................................................................................2-5

2.2.1 Current Differential Protection .......................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.3 IDMT Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Thermal Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................ 2-7
2.2.6 Zero Sequence IDMT Overcurrent Protection................................................................... 2-7
2.2.7 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ....................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.8 Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Element ........................................................................ 2-7
2.2.9 Sensitive Earth Fault IDMT Protection.............................................................................. 2-8
2.2.10 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection ................................................................... 2-8
2.2.11 Broken Conductor Protection ......................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.12 Breaker Failure Protection ............................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.13 SOTF Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.14 Zero Sequence SOTF Overcurrent Protection................................................................ 2-9
2.2.15 Undervoltage Protection................................................................................................. 2-9
2.2.16 Overvoltage Protection................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3 Management Functions........................................................................................... 2-10

2.3.1 Metering Scope and Accuracy........................................................................................ 2-10

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.3.2 Control Performance ...................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.3 Clock Performance ........................................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.4 Fault and Disturbance Recording ................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.5 Binary Input Signal..........................................................................................................2-11
2.3.6 Transient Overreach .......................................................................................................2-11
2.4 Certification .................................................................................................................2-11

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.1 General Specification
2.1.1 Electrical Specifications
2.1.1.1 Power Supply
Standard IEC60255-11: 2008

Rated voltage 30Vdc, 110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc, 110/220Vac
Variation 80% ~ 120%
Permissible ripple voltage Ma x 15% of the rated voltage (DC power supply)
Traditional AC inputs < 15W @ Quiescent condition; < 25W @ Operating condition
Burden
Digital AC inputs < 20W @ Quiescent condition; < 30W @ Operating condition
2.1.1.2 Analog Current Input Ratings
Phase rotation ABC

Rated frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Nominal range fn ± 5Hz
Application object For protection For metering For SEF
Rated current (In) 1A 5A 1A 5A 1A
Linear to 30×In 30×In 2×In 2×In 2×In
continuously 3×In 3×In 2×In 2×In 2×In
Thermal
for 10s 30×In 30×In 12×In 12×In 12×In
withstand
for 1s 100×In 100×In 30×In 30×In 30×In
capability
for half a cycle 250×In 250×In 75×In 75×In 75×In
Burden (@ In, per phase) < 0.15VA < 0.25VA < 0.20VA < 0.40VA < 0.20VA
2.1.1.3 Analog Voltage Input Ratings
Phase rotation ABC

Rated frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Nominal range fn ± 5Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V ~ 130V (phase-to-phase voltage)
Linear to 130V
Thermal continuously 130V
withstand 10s 200V
capability 1s 250V
Burden < 0.10VA / phase
2.1.1.4 Binary Input
Binary input number Up to 38

Rated voltage 24V 30V 48V 110V 125V 220V 250V
Rated current 1.20mA 1.50mA 2.40mA 1.10mA 1.25mA 2.20mA 2.50mA
Pickup voltage 55% ~ 70% rated voltage
“ON” value voltage 70% ~ 120% rated voltage

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
“OFF” value voltage < 50% rated voltage

Ma ximum permitted voltage 120% rated voltage
High voltage withstand 2000Vac, 2800Vdc
Resolving time for logic input < 1ms
2.1.1.5 Binary Output
Item Tripping output Signal output

Binary output number Up to 14 Up to 5
Output model Potential-free contact Potential-free contact
Ma x system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc 380Vac, 250Vdc
Voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1000V RMS for 1min
Continuous carry 5.0A @ 380Vac; 5.0 A @ 250Vdc 5.0A @ 380Vac; 5.0 A @ 250Vdc
Short duration current 6A for 3000ms; 15A for 500ms 6A for 3000ms; 15A for 500ms
0.65A @ 48 Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.65A @ 48 Vdc, L/R=40ms
Breaking capacity 0.30A @ 110Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.30A @ 110Vdc, L/R=40ms
0.15A @ 220Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.15A @ 220Vdc, L/R=40ms
Pickup time < 8ms < 8ms
Dropout time < 5ms < 5ms
Bounce time 1ms 1ms
loaded contact 10,000 operations minimum 10,000 operations minimum
Durability
unloaded contact 20,000 operations minimum 20,000 operations minimum
2.1.2 Mechanical Specifications
Enclosure dimensions See Figure 11.6-1

Trepanning dimensions See Figure 11.6-1, M6 screw
Mounting way Flush mounted
Weight per device Approx. 7.0kg (fully equipped)
Local control panel Small control module: a 240×128-dot LCD, a 9-key keypad and 20 LEDs
Display language Optional: Chinese, English
Housing material Aluminum
Housing color Silver grey
Location of terminals Rear panel of the device
Front side: IP51
Protection class IEC60225-1: 2009 Rear side, connection terminals: IP20
Other Sides: IP30
2.1.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity
Standard IEC60225-1: 2009

Operating temperature range -40°C ~ +70°C (for the LCD -20°C ~ +70°C)
Transport and storage temperature range -40°C ~ +70°C
Permissible humidity 5% ~ 95%, condensation not permissible
Altitude < 3000m

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.1.4 Communication Interfaces
2.1.4.1 Ethernet Port for RTU/SCADA
Medium Parameters
Port number 3 or 4
Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Electrical Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Transmission distance < 100m
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, IEC61850 etc.
Safety le vel Isolation to ELV level
Ethernet Port number 2
Connector type ST
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-FX
Optical
Optical fiber type Multi-mode
Wavelength 1300nm
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, IEC61850 etc.
2.1.4.2 Serial Port for RTU/SCADA
Medium Parameters
Port number 0 or 2
Baud rate 4800 ~ 115200bps
Transmission distance < 500m @ 4800bps
RS-485 (EIA)
Ma ximal capacity 32
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, DNP3.0 etc.
2.1.4.3 Serial Port for Printer
Medium Parameters
Port number 1
Baud rate 4800 ~ 115200bps
RS-232 (EIA)
Printer type EPSON ® LQ-300K
2.1.4.4 Serial Port for Time Synchronization
Medium Parameters
Port number 1
RS-485 (EIA) Ma ximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.1.4.5 Ethernet Port for Debugging
Medium Parameters
Port number 1
Connector type RJ-45
Electrical Ethernet Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
(in front panel) Transmission standard 100Base-TX
2.1.5 Type Test
2.1.5.1 Environmental Tests
Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1: 2007, 16h at -25°C

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2: 2007, 16h at +55°C
Damp heat test IEC60068-2-78: 2001, 10 days, 93%RH, +55°C
Cyclic temperature with IEC60068-2-30: 2005, six (12+12hours) cycles, 95%RH,
humidity test low temperature +25°C, high temperature +55°C
2.1.5.2 Electrical Tests
Dielectric test IEC60255-27: 2005, test voltage: 2kV, 50Hz, 1min

IEC60255-5: 2000, test voltage: 5kV, unipolar impulses, waveform 1.2/50μs,
Impulse voltage test
source energy 0.5J
Overvoltage category IEC60255-5: 2000, Class III
Insulation measurement IEC60255-5: 2000, insulation resistance >100MΩ @ 500Vdc
Pollution degree IEC60225-1: 2009, Class II
2.1.5.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60255-22-1:2007 IEEE C37.90.1-2002

1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class Ⅲ 2.5kV Common mode: 2.5kV
Differential mode: class Ⅲ 1.0kV Differential mode: 2.5kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class Ⅳ IEEE C37.90.3-2001
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class Ⅲ IEEE C37.90.2-2004
Frequency sweep 20V/m (rms,
Frequency sweep
unmodulated)
Radiated amplitude-modulated
Amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference f=80~1000MHz
tests Spot frequency Spot frequency 20V/m (rms,
Radiated amplitude-modulated unmodulated)
10V/m(rms), Radiated amplitude-modulated
f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz f=80MHz/160MHz/380MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated /450MHz/900MH z;

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz Radiated pulse-modulated

f=900MHz
IEC 60255-22-4:2008 IEEE C37.90.1-2002
Power supply, I/O, Earth: class Ⅳ, 4kV, Power supply, I/O: 4kV, 2.5kHz,
Fast transient disturbance tests 2.5kHz, 5/50ns 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class Ⅳ, Communication terminals: 2kV,
2kV, 5kH z, 5/50ns 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class Ⅳ, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
Conducted RF Electromagnetic IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Disturbance Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class Ⅲ, 10Vrms, 150 kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity Class Ⅴ, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
Class Ⅴ, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic IEC 61000-4-10:2001
field immunity Class Ⅴ, 100kHz & 1MH z–100A/m
Au xiliary power supply IEC 60255-11: 2008
performance
- Voltage dips Up to 200ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 30ms for interruption without rebooting
2.1.5.4 Mechanical Tests
Vibration test IEC60255-21-1:1988, Class I

Shock test IEC60255-21-2:1988, Class I
Bump test IEC60255-21-2:1988, Class I
Seismic test IEC60255-21-3:1988, Class I
2.2 Protective Functions
2.2.1 Current Differential Protection
Differential current setting 0.08×In ~ 30.0×In

Tolerance of current setting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01×In, whichever is greater
Tolerance of time setting ≤ 50ms
Optical channel parameters
Connector type ST FC
Optical fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode
Wavelength 850nm 1310nm
Transmission distance ≤ 2km ≤ 40km
Transmission power Min. -20dBm -14dBm ~ -10dBm

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
Reception power Min. -30dBm Min. -36dBm

Temperature range -20°C ~ +85°C -40°C ~ +85°C
2.2.2 Overcurrent Protection
Current setting 0.05×In ~ 30.0×In

Pickup current 1.00×Setting
Dropout current 0.95×Setting
Tolerance of current s etting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01×In, whichever is greater
Time setting 0.00s ~ 100.00s
Pickup time ≤ 35ms
Dropout time ≤ 35ms
Tolerance of time setting ≤ 1% Setting + 35ms
Voltage control e lement
Negative overvoltage element setting 2.00V ~ 70.00V
Undervoltage element setting 2.00V ~ 120.00V
Tolerance of voltage setting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.10V, whichever is greater
Phase directional element
Directionality Optional: Forward, Reverse
Characteristic angle Configurable: -180°~179°, step is 1°
Boundary and angle accuracy ±3°
Block logic Permission or block selectable by setting
2.2.3 IDMT Overcurrent Protection
Current threshold setting 0.05×In ~ 4.0×In

Tolerance of current threshold setting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01×In, whichever is greater
Time multiplier setting 0.05 ~ 100.00
≤ 5% of reference (calculated) value + 2.5% current
Tolerance of trip time for 1.2 < I/Ip < 30
tolerance or 35ms, whichever is greater
2.2.4 Thermal Overload Protection
Reference current setting 0.05×In ~ 3.0×In

Tolerance of reference current setting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01×In, whichever is greater
Time constant setting 0.01s ~ 6000.00s
Tolerance of trip time for 1.2 < I/(k×Ib) < 20

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.2.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection

Zero sequence directional element
2.2.6 Zero Sequence IDMT Overcurrent Protection
Current threshold setting 0.05×In ~ 4.0×In

Tolerance of current threshold setting ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01×In, whichever is greater
2.2.7 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Current setting 0.005A ~ 1.000A, dedicated CT

Tolerance of current setting ≤ 1.5% Setting or 1mA, whichever is greater
2.2.8 Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Element

Operating time ≤ 35ms

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.2.9 Sensitive Earth Fault IDMT Protection
Current threshold setting 0.005A ~ 1.000A, dedicated CT

Tolerance of current threshold setting ≤ 1.5% Setting or 1mA, whichever is greater
2.2.10 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection

2.2.11 Broken Conductor Protection
I2/I1 Ratio setting 0.10 ~ 1.00

Pickup ratio 1.00×Setting
Dropout ratio 0.95×Setting
2.2.12 Breaker Failure Protection


Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.2.13 SOTF Overcurrent Protection

2.2.14 Zero Sequence SOTF Overcurrent Protection

2.2.15 Undervoltage Protection
Voltage setting 2.00V ~ 120.00V

Pickup voltage 1.00×Setting
Dropout voltage Configurable: 1.01×Setting ~ 3.00×Setting
2.2.16 Overvoltage Protection
Voltage setting 57.70V ~ 200.00V

Pickup voltage 1.00×Setting
Dropout voltage Configurable: 0.93×Setting ~ 0.99×Setting

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.3 Management Functions
2.3.1 Metering Scope and Accuracy
Metering Item Range Accuracy

Phase range 0°~ 360° ≤ 0.5% or ±1°
Frequency 35.00Hz ~ 70.00Hz ≤ 0.01Hz
Currents from dedicated metering current transformers
Current 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.2% of rating
Voltage 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un ≤ 0.5% of rating
Acti ve power (W) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.5% of rating at unity power factor
Reactive Power (Vars) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.5% of rating at zero power factor
Apparent Power (VA) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.5% of rating
Energy (Wh) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.5% of rating at unity power factor
Energy (Varh) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 0.5% of rating at zero power factor
Currents from protection measurement current transformers
Current 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 2.0% of rating
Voltage 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un ≤ 0.5% of rating
Acti ve power (W) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 3.0% of rating at unity power factor
Reactive Power (Vars) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 3.0% of rating at zero power factor
Apparent Power (VA) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 3.0% of rating
Energy (Wh) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 3.0% of rating at unity power factor
Energy (Varh) 0.05 ~ 1.20×Un, 0.05 ~ 1.40×In ≤ 3.0% of rating at zero power factor
2.3.2 Control Performance
Control mode Local or remote

Accuracy of local control ≤ 1s
Accuracy of remote control ≤ 3s
2.3.3 Clock Performance
Real time clock accuracy ≤ 3s/day

Accuracy of GPS synchronization ≤ 1ms
External time synchronization IRIG-B (200-98), PPS or SNTP protocol
2.3.4 Fault and Disturbance Recording
Magnitude and relative phases ≤ 2.5% of applied quantities

Ma ximum duration 10000 sampled points (24 sampled points per cycle)
Configurable, 0~50 cycles before pickup of a trigger
Recording position
element

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data
2.3.5 Binary Input Signal
Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms

Binary input mode Potential-free contact
Resolution of SOE ≤ 2ms
2.3.6 Transient Overreach
Transient overreach (DC offset) ≤ 5% for X/R ≤ 100
2.4 Certification
 ISO9001: 2008
 ISO14001: 2004
 OHSAS18001: 2007
 ISO10012: 2003
 CMMI L5
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263: 1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1: 2001

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Technical Data

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................3-1

3.2 Fault Detectors .............................................................................................................3-1
3.3 Current Differential Protection .................................................................................3-3

3.3.1 Fiber Optical Channel and Data Synchronization ............................................................. 3-3
3.3.2 Fault Detector of Differential Protection ............................................................................ 3-4
3.3.3 Current Differential Protection .......................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.4 Binary Input Signal Interchange Function ........................................................................3-11
3.3.5 Current Differential Protection Settings .......................................................................... 3-12
3.4 Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................................... 3-12

3.4.1 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 3-12
3.4.2 Inverse Definite Minimum Time Overcurrent Protection .................................................. 3-14
3.4.3 Voltage Control Element for Overcurrent Protection ....................................................... 3-16
3.4.4 Directional Element for Overcurrent Protection .............................................................. 3-18
3.4.5 Harmonic Blocking Element for Overcurrent Protection .................................................. 3-19
3.4.6 Overcurrent Protection Settings ..................................................................................... 3-20
3.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection.............................................................. 3-23

3.5.1 Definite Time Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection..................................................... 3-23
3.5.2 IDMT Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection................................................................. 3-25
3.5.3 Directional Element for Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection...................................... 3-25
3.5.4 Harmonic Blocking Element for ROC Protection............................................................. 3-27
3.5.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings ............................................................ 3-28
3.6 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ........................................................................... 3-30

3.6.1 Definite Time Sensitive Earth Fault Protection................................................................ 3-30
3.6.2 IDMT Sensitive Earth Fault Protection............................................................................ 3-31
3.6.3 Directional Element for Sensitive Earth Fault Protection................................................. 3-31

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.6.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Settings ....................................................................... 3-33
3.7 Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................ 3-34

3.7.1 Thermal Overload Protection Theory.............................................................................. 3-34
3.7.2 Thermal Overload Protection Settings............................................................................ 3-36
3.8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection...................................................... 3-37

3.8.1 Definite Time Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection .............................................. 3-37
3.8.2 IDMT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection .......................................................... 3-38
3.8.3 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings...................................................... 3-38
3.9 Broken Conductor Protection ............................................................................... 3-39

3.9.1 Broken Conductor Protection Theory ............................................................................. 3-39
3.9.2 Broken Conductor Protection Settings............................................................................ 3-40
3.10 Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................................... 3-40

3.10.1 Breaker Failure Protection Theory................................................................................ 3-40
3.10.2 Breaker Failure Protection Settings .............................................................................. 3-42
3.11 Switch Onto Fault (SOTF) Protection ................................................................ 3-42

3.11.1 SOTF Protection Theory............................................................................................... 3-42
3.11.2 SOTF Protection Settings............................................................................................. 3-44
3.12 Undervoltage Protection....................................................................................... 3-44

3.12.1 Undervoltage Protection Theory ................................................................................... 3-44
3.12.2 Undervoltage Protection Settings ................................................................................. 3-46
3.13 Overvoltage Protection ......................................................................................... 3-47

3.13.1 Overvoltage Protection Theory ..................................................................................... 3-47
3.13.2 Overvoltage Protection Settings ................................................................................... 3-48
3.14 Mechanical Protection .......................................................................................... 3-49

3.14.1 Mechanical Protection Theory ...................................................................................... 3-49
3.14.2 Mechanical Protection Settings .................................................................................... 3-49
3.15 Auto-recloser ........................................................................................................... 3-50

3.15.1 Auto-recloser Theory.................................................................................................... 3-50
3.15.2 Auto-recloser Ready Conditions ................................................................................... 3-53
3.15.3 Auto-recloser Startup Condition.................................................................................... 3-54

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.15.4 Auto-recloser Check Mode ........................................................................................... 3-54
3.15.5 Auto-recloser Blocking Logic ........................................................................................ 3-56
3.15.6 Auto-recloser Settings.................................................................................................. 3-57
3.16 Manual Closing Function ..................................................................................... 3-58

3.16.1 Manual Closing Theory ................................................................................................ 3-58
3.16.2 Check Mode for Manual Closing Function .................................................................... 3-59
3.16.3 Manual Closing Function Settings ................................................................................ 3-61
List of Figures
Figure 3.3-1 Demonstration system for the current differential protection......................... 3-3
Figure 3.3-2 Operation characteristic of the stage 1 differential protection........................ 3-5
Figure 3.3-3 Logic diagram of the stage 1 differential protection of phase A ..................... 3-6
Figure 3.3-4 Logic diagram of the stage 1 differential protection ........................................ 3-7
Figure 3.3-5 Operation characteristic of the stage 2 differential protection........................ 3-7
Figure 3.3-6 Logic diagram of the stage 2 differential protection of phase A ..................... 3-8
Figure 3.3-7 Logic diagram of the stage 2 differential protection ........................................ 3-9
Figure 3.3-8 Logic diagram of the inter-tripping function of phase A................................ 3-10
Figure 3.3-9 Demonstration diagram of the interchange binary input signals...................3-11
Figure 3.4-1 Demonstration characteristic of the overcurrent protection ......................... 3-13
Figure 3.4-2 Logic diagram of the stage 1 overcurrent protection .................................... 3-13
Figure 3.4-5 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A voltage control element ......................... 3-17
Figure 3.4-6 Operation characteristic of the OC directional element ................................ 3-18
Figure 3.4-7 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A directional element ................................ 3-19
Figure 3.4-8 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A harmonic blocking element ................... 3-20
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of the zero sequence overcurrent protection ........................ 3-24
Figure 3.5-2 Logic diagram of the stage 4 zero sequence IDMT overcurrent protection.. 3-25
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of the ROC directional element .............................. 3-26
Figure 3.5-4 Logic diagram of the directional element for the ROC1 protection .............. 3-27
PCS-9613 Differential Relay 3-c

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.5-5 Logic diagram of the ROC1 harmonic blocking element ............................... 3-27
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram for the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection...................... 3-30
Figure 3.6-2 Logic diagram of the IDMT sensitive earth fault protection .......................... 3-31
Figure 3.6-3 Operation characteristic of the SEF directional element ............................... 3-32
Figure 3.6-4 Logic diagram of the directional element for the stage 1 SEF protection .... 3-32
Figure 3.7-1 Characteristic curve of the thermal overload model...................................... 3-35
Figure 3.7-2 Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection......................................... 3-36
Figure 3.8-1 Logical diagram of the stage 2 NOC protection ............................................. 3-37
Figure 3.8-2 Logic diagram of the IDMT negative sequence overcurrent protection ....... 3-38
Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of the broken conductor protection ....................................... 3-39
Figure 3.10-1 Logic diagram of the breaker failure protection........................................... 3-41
Figure 3.10-2 Timing for a typical breaker failure scenario ................................................ 3-41
Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of the SOTF protection.......................................................... 3-43
Figure 3.12-1 Logic diagram of the system lost voltage for the UV1 protection............... 3-45
Figure 3.12-2 Logic diagram of the stage 1 undervoltage protection ................................ 3-45
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of the stage 1 overvoltage protection .................................. 3-47
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of the No.1 mechanical protection ....................................... 3-49
Figure 3.15-1 Timing diagram for a successful second reclosing ..................................... 3-51
Figure 3.15-2 Timing diagram for an unsuccessful one-shot reclosing ............................ 3-52
Figure 3.15-3 Logic diagram of the auto-recloser............................................................... 3-52
Figure 3.15-4 Logic diagram of the auto-recloser ready conditions.................................. 3-53
Figure 3.15-5 Logic diagram of the synchronism check element for AR .......................... 3-55
Figure 3.15-6 Logic diagram of the dead check element for AR ........................................ 3-56
Figure 3.16-1 Logic diagram of the manual closing function............................................. 3-58
Figure 3.16-2 Logic diagram of the synchronism check element for manual closing ...... 3-60
Figure 3.16-3 Logic diagram of the dead check element for manual closing.................... 3-61
3-d PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Overview
The PCS-9613 relay is a microprocessor based relay which can provide matur e protection for the
feeder line. The following sections detail the individual protection functions of this relay.
NOTICE!
In each functional element, the signal input [XXXX.En1] is used for inputting the
enabling signals; and the signal input [XXXX.Blk] is used for inputting the blocking
signals. The “XXXX” is the name code of the functional element (such as “50/51P1”,
“49”, “50/51G2” etc.). They can be configured through the PCS-Explorer configuration
tool auxiliary software. If the signal input [XXXX.En1] is not used, its default value is “1”;
and if the signal input [XXXX.Blk] is not used, its default value is “0”.
3.2 Fault Detectors
The fault detector will operate if any of the following conditions is satisfied.
1. The startup conditions of the auto-recloser are satisfied if the auto-recloser is enabled and
ready for operating.
2. The fault detector of the current differential protection picks up if the current differential
protection is enabled, please see Section 3.3.1.
3. Any one of the phase currents is in excess of the setting of the stage 1 overcurrent protection
multiplied by 0.95 if the stage 1 overcurrent protection is enabled.
7. The zero sequence current is in excess of the setting of the stage 1 zero sequence
overcurrent protection multiplied by 0.95 if the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection
is enabled.
is enabled.
is enabled.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
is enabled.
11. The sensitive earth fault current is in excess of the current setting of the stage 1 sensitive
earth fault protection multiplied by 0.95 if the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection is
enabled.
enabled.
enabled.
enabled.
15. Any one of the phase currents is in excess of the setting of the SOTF overcurrent protection
multiplied by 0.97 if the SOTF overcurrent protection is enabled.
16. The zero sequence current is in excess of the setting of the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent
protection multiplied by 0.97 if the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection is enabled.
17. Any one of the phase currents is in excess of [49.K_Trp]×[49.Ib_Set] if the thermal overload
protection is enabled.
18. The negative sequence current is in excess of the setting of the stage 1 negative sequence
overcurrent protection multiplied by 0.95 if the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent
19. The negative sequence current is in excess of the setting of the stage 2 negative sequence
overcurrent protection multiplied by 0.95 if the stage 2 negative sequence overcurrent
20. The ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current (I2/I1) is in excess of the ratio setting
of the broken conductor protection multiplied by 0.95 if the broken conductor protection is
enabled.
21. Any one of the initiation signals of the breaker failure protection is detected if the breaker
failure protection is enabled.
22. The voltages are less than the setting of the stage 1 undervoltage protection multiplied by the
dropout coefficient setting of the stage 1 undervoltage protection if the stage 1 undervoltage
23. The voltages are less than the setting of the stage 2 undervoltage protection multiplied by the
dropout coefficient setting of the stage 2 undervoltage protection if the stage 2 undervoltage

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
24. The voltages are greater than the setting of the stage 1 overvoltage protection multiplied by
the dropout coefficient setting of the stage 1 overvoltage protection if the stage 1 overvoltage
25. The voltages are greater than the setting of the stage 2 overvoltage protection multiplied by
the dropout coefficient setting of the stage 2 overvoltage protection if the stage 2 overvoltage
26. If anyone the binary inputs of the mechanical protections is energized if the corresponding
mechanical protection is enabled.
If the auto-recloser is enabled, the FD (Fault Detector) element will reset to normal operation
status after the auto-recloser is reset; otherwise, the FD element will reset 500ms later after the
last one of the above items is reverted.
3.3 Current Differential Protection
3.3.1 Fiber Optical Channel and Data Synchronization

A dedicated FO channel module is adopted for data interchange in this relay. Following figure is a
demonstration system for explaining how the data interchange and synchronization reali zation.
Restraint Area Restraint Area

Operation Area
52 52
L FO channel for data interchange R
PCS-9613 PCS-9613
Figure 3.3-1 Demonstration system for the current differential protection
It needs two PCS-9613 relays for a protected feeder line, and a dedicated fiber optical channel is
adopted for data interchange. In the two PCS-9613 relays, one works as reference side (master
side) and another works as synchronization side (slave side).
The data interchange is processed through a synchronization mode. The sampling time interval of
the reference side (master side) is fixed, and it will transmit a data frame to the synchronization
side (slave side). Then the synchronization side (slave side) will modulate the sampling time
interval to ensure the sampled data of two sides is synchronized.
The prerequisites of the data synchronization are listed as below.
(1) The maximum unidirectional transmission delay of optical channel is not greater than 8ms.
(2) The two-directional transmission delay of optical channel is equal.
To improve the reliability of the data interchange of the current differential protection, this relay
contains two setting [FO.LocID] and [FO.RmtID] as channel identification code for identifying the
interchanged data. The setting [FO.LocID] should be set as unique in whole system, and the

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
setting [FO.RmtID] is set as same as the opposite device which can interchange data with this
device.
Two settings should be set as different values in normal operation situation. And if the setting
[FO.LocID] is greater than the setting [FO.RmtID], this relay will work as master (reference side);
otherwise, this relay will work as slave (synchronization side). For commissioning, the two settings
can be set as same values if the transmission terminal connects with the reception terminal
directly.
The setting [FO.LocID] is contained in the transmission data frame, and the opposite device will
check whether the identification code of the received data frame is same as the setting [FO.RmtID]
of the opposite device. If the two identification codes are not same, the current differential
protection will be disabled at once and the alarm signals [FO.Alm_ID] and [FO.Alm] will be issued
100ms later. If the data interchange recovers normally, these alarm signals will restore 1s later.
3.3.2 Fault Detector of Differential Protection

The fault detector of the current differential protection contains three independent elements: the
DPFC (Deviation of Power Frequency Component) phase-to-phase current fault detector, the
phase overcurrent fault detector and the zero sequence overcurrent fault detector. If any element
of the fault detector picks up, the pickup signal “Flg_Diff_PickUp” of the current differential
protection will be set as “1” and the current differential protection will be in service at once.
3.3.2.1 DPFC Current Fault Detector
This element adopts an adaptive floating threshold which consists of the unbalanced output of
deviation. The adaptive floating threshold is kept higher than the unbalanced output all along,
which makes it not pick up frequently and have an extremely high sensitivity and reliability. By
using the adaptive floating threshold, the unbalanced output value is small under normal condition,
so this element has extremely high sensitivity. If the power swing occurs, the adaptive floating
threshold increases while the sensitivity decreases automatically, so it is not influenced by the
power swing condition and need not be controlled by the power swing blocking element.
The criterion of the DPFC current fault detector is listed as below.
 I  MAX  1 . 25  I Th   I Set
Where:
“ΔIΦΦMA X” (ΦΦ: AB, BC or CA) is the maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase
current;
“ΔITh” is the floating threshold value;
“ΔISet ” is the fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [87L.I_DPFC_FD]).
3.3.2.2 Phase Overcurrent Fault Detector
If any phase current is greater than the setting of the overcurrent fault detector of the differential
protection (i.e. the setting [87L.I_OC_FD]), the phase overcurrent fault detector will pick up.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.3.2.3 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Fault Detector
If the zero sequence current from dedicated CT and the self-calculated zero sequence current are
greater than the setting of the zero sequence overcurrent fault detector of the current differential
protection (i.e. the setting [87L.3I0_ROC_FD]), the zero sequence overcurrent fault detector will
pick up.
3.3.3 Current Differential Protection

The current differential protection in this relay includes a two-stage phase-segregated current
differential protection and an inter-tripping logic element.
3.3.3.1 The Stage 1 Current Differential Protection
The criterion of the stage 1 current differential protection is listed as below.
 I d   0 . 6 I r
I  I
 d H
 I  I  I
 d L R
 I r  IL  IR

Where:
“IdΦ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the phase differential current;
“IrΦ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the restraint differential current;
“IH ” is 1.5 times of the current setting of differential protection ([87L.I_Biased]).
The operation characteristic of the stage 1 current differential protection is shown as below.
IdΦ
0. 6
k=
IH
O IrΦ
Figure 3.3-2 Operation characteristic of the stage 1 differential protection
The stage 1 current differential protection operates without any time delay.
The logic diagram of the stage 1 current differential protection of phase A is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[87L.En]
& 87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Loc
[87L.En1]
[87L.Blk] &
[FO.Alm]
[FO.En]
&
87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Rmt
Flg_2ndHarmBlk_A
& Flg_Diff1_Meet_A
Flg_3rdHarmBlk_A
Ida,Ira
IH
Flg_Diff_PickUp
&
87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt
&
Flg_Diff1_Op_A
[87L.En_LocDiff]
&
87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Rmt &
[87L.En_IntTrp]
Figure 3.3-3 Logic diagram of the stage 1 differential protection of phase A
Where:
[87L.En] is the logic setting of the differential protection;
[87L.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the differential protection;
[87L.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the differential protection;
[FO.Alm] is the alarm signal of the fiber optical channel, see Section 3.3.1;
[FO.En] is the logic setting for enabling or disabling the FO communication function;
“87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Loc” is the blocking signal of the differential protection which can be

transmitted to opposite device for blocking the differential protection of opposite device;
“87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Rmt” is the blocking signal of the differential protection which is from the
opposite device for blocking the differential protection of local device;
“Flg_2ndHarmBlk_A” is the 2nd harmonic blocking signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.4;
“Flg_3rdHarmBlk_A” is the 3rd harmonic blocking signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.4;
“Ida” and “Ira” is the differential current and restraint current of phase A respectively;
“Flg_Diff1_Meet_A” is the signal means the differential conditions of phase A is satisfied;
“Flg_Diff_PickUp” is the signal means the fault detector of the differential protection picks up,
see Section 3.3.2;
“87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt” is the permission signal of the differential protection which is from

opposite device for permitting the differential protection operation of local device, see Section
3.3.3.3;
[87L.En_LocDiff] is the logic setting for enabling the differential protection of the local device
independently;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
“87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Rmt” is the inter-tripping signal of the differential protection which is from

opposite device for operating the differential protection of local device, see Section 3.3.3.3;
[87L.En_IntTrp] is the logic setting for enabling the inter-tripping function.
The logic diagrams of the stage 1 current differential protection of phase B and phase C can be
gotten on the analogy of this.
The logic diagram of the stage 1 current differential protection is show as below.
Flg_Diff1_Op_A
Flg_Diff1_Op_B [87L.Op_Biased1]
Flg_Diff1_Op_C
Figure 3.3-4 Logic diagram of the stage 1 differential protection
Where
“Flg_Diff1_Op_Φ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the stage 1 phase differential operation signal;
[87L.Op_Biased1] is the operation signal of the stage 1 differential protection.
3.3.3.2 The Stage 2 Current Differential Protection
The criterion of the stage 2 current differential protection is listed as below.
 I d  0 .6 I r

 I d  IM

I  I L   I R 
 d
 I r  I L   I R 

Where:
“IdΦ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the phase differential current;
“IrΦ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the restraint differential current;
“IM” is the current setting of differential protection ([87L.I_Biased]).
The operation characteristic of the stage 2 current differential protection is shown as below.
IdΦ
0. 6
k=
IM
O IrΦ
Figure 3.3-5 Operation characteristic of the stage 2 differential protection

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
The stage 2 current differential protection operates with 25ms delay.
The logic diagram of the stage 2 current differential protection of phase A is shown in Figure 3.3-6.
[87L.En]
& 87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Loc
[87L.En1]
[87L.Blk] &
[FO.Alm]
[FO.En]
&
87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Rmt
Flg_2ndHarmBlk_A
& Flg_Diff2_Meet_A
Flg_3rdHarmBlk_A
Ida,Ira
IM
Flg_Diff_PickUp
&
87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt
&
25ms 0
Flg_Diff2_Op_A
[87L.En_LocDiff]
&
87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Rmt &
[87L.En_IntTrp]
Figure 3.3-6 Logic diagram of the stage 2 differential protection of phase A
Where:
[87L.En] is the logic setting of the differential protection;
[87L.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the differential protection;
[87L.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the differential protection;
[FO.Alm] is the alarm signal of the fiber optical channel, see Section 3.3.1;
[FO.En] is the logic setting for enabling or disabling the FO communication function;
“87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Loc” is the blocking signal of the differential protection which can be

transmitted to opposite device for blocking the differential protection of opposite device ;
“87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Rmt” is the blocking signal of the differential protection which is from the
opposite device for blocking the differential protection of local device;
“Flg_2ndHarmBlk_A” is the 2nd harmonic blocking signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.4;
“Flg_3rdHarmBlk_A” is the 3rd harmonic blocking signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.4;
“Ida” and “Ira” is the differential current and restraint current of phase A respectively;
“Flg_Diff2_Meet_A” is the signal means the differential conditions of phase A is satisfied;
see Section 3.3.2;
“87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt” is the permission signal of the differential protection which is from

opposite device for permitting the differential protection operation of local device, see Section

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.3.3.3;
independently;
“87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Rmt” is the inter-tripping signal of the differential protection which is from

opposite device for operating the differential protection of local device, see Section 3.3.3.3;
[87L.En_IntTrp] is the logic setting for enabling the inter-tripping function.
The logic diagrams of the stage 2 current differential protection of phase B and phase C can be
gotten on the analogy of this.
The logic diagram of the stage 2 current differential protection is show as below.
Flg_Diff2_Op_A
Flg_Diff2_Op_B [87L.Op_Biased2]
Flg_Diff2_Op_C
Figure 3.3-7 Logic diagram of the stage 2 differential protection
Where
“Flg_Diff2_Op_Φ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the stage 2 phase differential operation signal;
[87L.Op_Biased2] is the operation signal of the stage 2 differential protection.
3.3.3.3 The Inter-tripping Logic
If a grounded fault with high transition resistance occurs at the point where is very near to one end
of the feeder line (for example, the fault occurs near to “L” side in Figure 3.3-1.). The current
differential protection near to the fault point will pick up at once, but the current differential
protection at the opposite side maybe can not pick up because the detected fault component is
not great enough, so the current differential protection in this system can not operate quickly.
To the above-mentioned situation, this relay has an inter-tripping logic for dealing with this case.
The current differential protection near to the fault point will transmit the inter -tripping signals to
the differential relay at the opposite side after it operates. The current differential protection at the
opposite side will pick up after it receives the inter-tripping signals, and it will operate with the
permissive signals from the differential relay at other side.
The logic diagram of the inter-tripping function of phase A is shown as below. The logic diagrams
of the inter-tripping function of phase B and phase C can be gotten on the analogy of this.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Flg_Diff1_Op_A
87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Loc
Flg_Diff2_Op_A
Flg_Diff_PickUp
Flg_Diff1_Meet_A
&
Flg_Diff2_Meet_A
87L.Sig_PermA_Loc
[BI_52b]
&
Ia > 0.04In
&
87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt
[87L.En_LocDiff]
Figure 3.3-8 Logic diagram of the inter-tripping function of phase A
Where:
“Flg_Diff1_Op_A” is the stage 1 differential operation signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.1;
“Flg_Diff2_Op_A” is the stage 2 differential operation signal of phase A, see Section 3.3.3.2;
see Section 3.3.2;
“Flg_Diff1_Meet_A” is the signal means the stage 1 differential conditions of phase A is

satisfied, see Section 3.3.3.1;
“Flg_Diff2_Meet_A” is the signal means the stage 2 differential conditions of phase A is

satisfied, see Section 3.3.3.2;
independently;
“87L.Sig_PermA_Loc” is the permission signal of the differential protection which can be

transmitted to opposite device for permitting the differential protection operation of opposite
device, see Section 3.3.3.3;
[BI_52b] is the binary input from the auxiliary normally closed contact of the circuit breaker;
“In” is the rated secondary value of the current transformer.
3.3.3.4 CT Saturation Detection
To prevent the maloperation of the current differential protection due to CT saturation if a fault
occurs out of the protected area of the current differential protection, this relay provides CT
saturation detection function.
The criterion of the CT saturation detection function is as below.
 I L  _ 2 nd _ max
 K  2 xb  I L  _ 1 st
(1) 
 I L  _ 3 rd _ max
 K  3 xb  I L  _ 1 st

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
 I R  _ 2 nd _ max
 K  2 xb  I R  _ 1 st
(2) 
 I R  _ 3 rd _ max
 K  3 xb  I R  _ 1 st
Where:
“ILΦ_ 1st ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the phase fundamental current at local side;
“IRΦ_1st ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the phase fundamental current at remote side;

nd
“ILΦ_ 2nd_max ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the maximum phase 2 harmonic current at local side;
“IRΦ_2n d_max ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the maximum phase 2 nd harmonic current at remote side;
“ILΦ_ 3rd_max ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the maximum phase 3 rd harmonic current at local side;
“IRΦ_3rd _max ” (Φ: A, B or C) is the maximum phase 3 rd harmonic current at remote side;
“K2Φxb” is the 2nd harmonic restraint coefficient.

rd
“K3Φxb” is the 3 harmonic restraint coefficient.
If a fault occurs out of the protected area of the current differential protection and any condition of
above two equations is satisfied, this relay will block the current differential protection at once.
3.3.3.5 Differential Current Supervision
If any phase differential current is greater than the differential protection setting ([87L.I_Biased])
for longer than 10s, this relay will issue the alarm signal [87L.Alm_Diff], but the current differential
protection is not blocked. The setting [87L.I_Biased] should be set to avoid the maximum
differential current in normal operation situation.
3.3.4 Binary Input Signal Interchange Function
This relay can support binary input signal interchange function through the fiber optical channel.
The local binary input signals which need to be transmitted are configurable through the
PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software. The received binary input signals from the
opposite side can be used for the local device.
The demonstration diagram of the interchange binary input signal is shown as below.
Local PCS-9613 FO channel Remote PCS-9613
FO.SendTS1 FO.RecvTS1
Figure 3.3-9 Demonstration diagram of the interchange binary input signals
Where:
“FO.SendTSx” (x: 1~4) is the interchange binary input transmission signal of the local device;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
“FO.RecvTSx” (x: 1~4) is the interchange binary input reception signal of the remote device.
3.3.5 Current Differential Protection Settings
All the settings of the current differential protection are listed in following table. For the information
about the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.
No. Menu text Explanation Range Step

1 FO.En The logic setting of the FO function module 0~1 1
2 FO.LocID The identification code of the local device 0~65535 1
3 FO.RmtID The identification code of the remote device 0~65535 1
4 87L.I_DPFC_FD The current setting of the DPFC fault detector 0.05In~30In 0.001A
5 87L.I_OC_FD The current setting of the overcurrent fault detector 0.05In~30In 0.001A
The current setting of the zero sequence overcurrent
6 87L.3I0_ROC_FD 0.05In~30In 0.001A
fault detector
7 87L.I_Biased The current setting of the current differential protection 0.08In~30In 0.001A
8 87L.En The logic setting of the current differential protection 0~1 1
The logic setting of the local independent differential
9 87L.En_LocDiff 0~1 1
protection
10 87L.En_IntTrp The logic setting of the inter-tripping function 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the current differential 0x0000 ~
11 87L.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
3.4 Overcurrent Protection
3.4.1 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
The overcurrent protection in this relay provides a six-stage phase overcurrent protection with
independent definite time characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled independently
by the logic settings respectively. All overcurrent element, directional element, voltage control
element and harmonic blocking element settings apply to all three phases but are independent for
each of the first four stages. The last two stages are pure overcurrent protections. Configuring the
relevant settings can enable or disable the corresponding protection.
The stage 1, 2, 5 and 6 overcurrent protections only have definite time characteristics. The stage
3 and 4 overcurrent protections can be set as either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum
time (IDMT). If the settings [50/51P3.Opt_Curve] and [50/51P4.Opt_Curve] are set as “0”, the
stage 3 and 4 overcurrent protections can be with definite time characteristics.
The demonstration characteristic figure of the DT overcurrent protection and IDMT overcurrent
protection is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
tDelay DT OC tDelay IDMT OC
50/51P2.t_Op
50/51P1.t_Op
50/51P2.I_Set 50/51P1.I_Set
Inom Inom
Figure 3.4-1 Demonstration characteristic of the overcurrent protection
The logic diagram of the stage 1 overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 3.4-2. The overcurrent
block is a level detector that detects whether the current magnitude is above the threshold.
Ia > [50/51P1.I_Set]
50/51P1.VCE_A
&
50/51P1.Dir_A
50/51P1.HmBlk_A
Ib > [50/51P1.I_Set]
50/51P1.VCE_B
&
50/51P1.Dir_B
50/51P1.HmBlk_B
Ic > [50/51P1.I_Set] [50/51P1.St]
50/51P1.VCE_C
& & tOC1 0
[50/51P1.Op]
50/51P1.Dir_C
50/51P1.HmBlk_C
[50/51P1.En]
[50/51P1.En1]
[50/51P1.Blk]
Figure 3.4-2 Logic diagram of the stage 1 overcurrent protection
Where:
[50/51P1.I_Set] is the current setting of the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
“tOC1” is the setting [50/51P1.t_Op], the time setting of the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
[50/51P1.En] is the logic setting of the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
[50/51P1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
[50/51P1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
“50/51P1.VCE_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the state of the voltage control element of the stage 1
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.3 for more details about the voltage control element;
“50/51P1.Dir_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the state of the directional element of the stage 1
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.4 for more details about the directional element;
“50/51P1.HmBlk_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the harmonic blocking element of the stage 1
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.5 for more details about the harmonic blocking
element.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
The stage 2 overcurrent protection has the same logic diagram with the stage 1 overcurrent
protection, but the operation threshold is its own setting threshold.
The logic diagram of the stage 5 overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 3.4-3.
Ia > [50/51P5.I_Set]
Ib > [50/51P5.I_Set] [50/51P5.St]
Ic > [50/51P5.I_Set]
tOC5 0
[50/51P5.En] & [50/51P5.Op]
[50/51P5.En1]
[50/51P5.Blk]
Where:
[50/51P5.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 5 overcurrent protection.
3.4.2 Inverse Definite Minimum Time Overcurrent Protection

The stage 3 and 4 overcurrent protections also can be used as inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) overcurrent protection if the settings [50/51P3.Opt_Curve] and [50/51P4.Opt_Curve] are
set as “1”.
Various methods are available to achieve correct relay coordination on a system; by means of
time alone, current alone or a combination of both time and curren t. Grading by means of current
is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in fault level between the two relay
locations. Grading by time is used by some utilities but can often lead to excessive fault clearance
times at or near source substations where the fault level is highest. For these reasons the most
commonly applied characteristic in coordinating overcurrent relays is the IDMT type.
The inverse time delayed characteristics comply with the following formula (based on IEC60255 -3
and IEEE Std C37.112-1996 standard).
 k 
t    C   Tp
 (I / I )  1
 
 p 
Where:
k = Constant, the setting [50/51Px.K] (x: 3 or 4).
α = Constant, the setting [50/51Px.Alpha] (x: 3 or 4).

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
C = Constant, the setting [50/51Px.C] (x: 3 or 4).
t = Operation time.
I = Measured phase current.
Ip is the current threshold setting; the current setting of the stage x (x: 3 or 4) overcurrent
[50/51Px.I_Set] (x: 3 or 4) is used as the Ip in this relay. If the stage x (x: 3 or 4) overcurrent
protection is used as IDMT overcurrent protection, the range of the setting [50/51Px.I_Set] (x:
3 or 4) is 0.05×In ~ 4×In.
T p is the time multiplier setting; the multiplier setting of the IDMT overcurrent protection
[50/51Px.TMS] (x: 3 or 4) is used as T p in this relay. If the stage x (x: 3 or 4) overcurrent
protection is used as IDMT overcurrent protection, the range of the setting [50/51Px.TMS] (x:
3 or 4) is 0.05 ~ 100.00.
Some recommended types of IDMT characteristic curves are applied in this relay. It is also can be
programmed according to the demand of the special practical application through the
PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software.
The setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] (x: 3 or 4) can be used to select the expected curve.
Setting Value Standard Time Characteristic k α C

0 Definite Time × × ×
1 IEC Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02 0.00
2 IEC Very Inverse 13.5 1.00 0.00
3 IEC Extremely In verse 80.0 2.00 0.00
4 IEC Short Time Inverse 0.05 0.04 0.00
5 IEC Long Time Inverse 120.0 1.00 0.00
6 IEEE (ANSI) Extremely In verse 28.20 2.00 0.1217
7 IEEE (ANSI) Very Inverse 19.61 2.00 0.491
8 IEEE (ANSI) Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185
9 IEEE (ANSI) Moderately In verse 0.0515 0.02 0.114
10 IEEE (ANSI) Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.00 0.25
11 IEEE (ANSI) Long Time Very In verse 28.55 2.00 0.712
12 IEEE (ANSI) Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185
13 User Programmable
If the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] (x: 3 or 4) is set as “1” to “12”, these settings [50/51Px.K],
[50/51Px.Alpha] and [50/51Px.C] (x: 3 or 4) do not need to be set, and these values as listed in
above table will be used.
The logic diagram of the stage 4 overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 3.4-4. The overcurrent
block is a level detector that detects whether the current magnitude is above the threshold.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Ia > [50/51P4.I_Set]
50/51P4.VCE_A
&
50/51P4.Dir_A
50/51P4.HmBlk_A
Ib > [50/51P4.I_Set]
50/51P4.VCE_B
&
50/51P4.Dir_B
50/51P4.HmBlk_B
Ic > [50/51P4.I_Set] [50/51P4.St]
50/51P4.VCE_C
& &
50/51P4.Dir_C
tOC4 0
50/51P4.HmBlk_C & [50/51P4.Op]
[50/51P4.En]
[50/51P4.En1]
[50/51P4.Blk] IDMT
& [50/51P4.Op]
[50/51P4.Opt_Curve] = 0
Where:
[50/51P4.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 4 overcurrent protection;
[50/51P4.Opt_Curve] is the setting for selecting the inverse time characteristic curve;
“50/51P4.VCE_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the state of the voltage control element of the stage 4
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.3 for more details about the voltage control element;
“50/51P4.Dir_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the state of the directional element of the stage 4
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.4 for more details about the directional element;
“50/51P4.HmBlk_x (x: A, B, C)” denotes the harmonic blocking element of the stage 4
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.4.5 for more details about the harmonic blocking
element.
3.4.3 Voltage Control Element for Overcurrent Protection
If the current detected by a local relay for a remote fault condition is below its overcurrent setting,
a voltage controlled overcurrent (VCO) element may be used to increase the relay sensitivity to
such faults. In this case, a reduction in system voltage will occur; this may then be used to reduce
the pick up level of the overcurrent protection. The VCO function can be selectively enabled on
the first four stages of the main overcurrent element, which was described in Section 3.4.1. When
the VCO is enabled, the overcurrent setting can be modified just to be in excess of the maximum

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
value of the load current.
Overcurrent Element Voltage for Controlling

Ia> Uab< or Uca< or U2>
Ib> Ubc< or Uab< or U2>
Ic> Uca< or Ubc< or U2>
Note that the voltage dependent overcurrent relays are more often applied in practical protection
applications in order to give adequate overcurrent relay sensitivity for close up fault conditions.
The fault characteristic of this protection must then coordinate with any of the downstream
overcurrent relays that are responsive to the current decrement condition. It therefore follows that
if this relay is to be applied on an outgoing feeder from a generator station, the use of voltage
controlled overcurrent protection in the feeder relay may allow better coordination with the VCO
relay on the generator.
For the operation accuracy of the VCO protection, it is necessary to take the status of the voltage
transformer into account. If the voltage transformer has a fault, the numerical relay will issue a
[VTS.Alm] signal and block all the elements that relate to the voltage measurement.
The logic diagram of the voltage control overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 3.4-2. Each
stage of the overcurrent protection can be set with voltage control by its relevant independent
setting respectively. The detailed logic diagram for the voltage control element of phase A for the
stage 1 overcurrent protection is shown as below. The logic diagrams for voltage control elements
of phase B and phase C can be gotten on the analogy of this.
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
[VTS.En]
[VTS.Alm]
&
Uab < [50/51P.Upp_VCE]
Uca < [50/51P.Upp_VCE] 50/51P1.VCE_A
U2 > [50/51P.U2_VCE]
[50/51P1.En_VCE]
Figure 3.4-5 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A voltage control element
Where:
[50/51P.Upp_VCE] is the voltage setting of the undervoltage control element;
[50/51P.U2_VCE] is the voltage setting of the negative sequence overvoltage control

element;
[VTS.En] is the logic setting of the protection voltage transformer supervision function;
[50/51P1.En_VCE] is the logic setting of the voltage control element for the OC1 protection;
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk] is the logic setting of the function which can block all the OC protective
elements that relate to the voltage measurement when the voltage transformer is failed;
[VTS.Alm] is the alarm signal of the protection voltage transformer supervision.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.4.4 Directional Element for Overcurrent Protection
The phase fault elements of this relay are internally polarized by the quadrature phase -to-phase
voltages, as shown in the table below:
Phase of Protection Operate Current Polarizing Voltage

A Phase Ia Ubc
B Phase Ib Uca
C Phase Ic Uab
Under system fault conditions, the fault current vector will lag its nominal phase voltage by an
angle dependent upon the system X/R ratio. It is therefore a requirement that the relay operates
with maximum sensitivity for currents lying in this region. This is achieved by means of the relay
characteristic angle (RCA) setting; this defines the angle by which the current applied to the relay
must be displaced from the voltage applied to the relay to obtain maximum relay sensitivity.
For a close up three-phase fault, all three voltages will collapse to zero and no healthy phase
voltage will be present. For this reason, the relay includes a synchronous polarization feature that
stores the pre-fault positive sequence voltage information and continues to apply it to the
directional overcurrent elements for a time period of 3 fundamental wave cycles, after which, it will
keep the result of the directional element, this ensures that either the instantaneous or the time
delayed directional overcurrent elements will be allowed to operate, even with a three-phase
voltage collapse.
The relay characteristic angle (RCA) is configurable through the setting [50/51P.RCA]. A
directional check is performed based on the following criteria:
 Directional forward
-90°< (angle(U) - angle(I) - RCA) < 90°
 Directional reverse
90°< (angle(U) - angle(I) - RCA) < 270°
Reverse
O U
RCA
I
Forward
Figure 3.4-6 Operation characteristic of the OC directional element
The setting [50/51Px.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage x (x:
1~4) overcurrent protection respectively.
Setting Value 0 1 2
Directional Mode Non-directional Forward directional Reverse directional

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Any of the first four overcurrent stages may be configured to be directional. When the element is
selected as directional, a VTS block option is available. When the relevant setting is set as “1”,
operation of the voltage transformer supervision (VTS) will block the stage if the relevant
directional element is in service. When the relevant setting is set as “0”, the stage will revert to
non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
The logic diagram of the phase directional overcurrent protection is shown in Figure 3.4-2. Each
stage of the overcurrent protection can be set with directional element control by its relevant
independent setting respectively. The detailed logic diagram for the phase A directional element
for the stage 1 overcurrent protection is shown as below. The logic diagrams of voltage control
elements of phase B and phase C can be gotten on the analogy of this.
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
[VTS.En]
[VTS.Alm] &
Ia (present measure) Phase A
Ubc(present measure) Direction
Check 50/51P1.Dir_A
Ubc(in memory)
[50/51P1.Opt_Dir] ≠ 0
Figure 3.4-7 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A directional element
Where:
[50/51P1.Opt_Dir] is the setting which is used to select the directional mode (non-directional,
forward, reverse) of the directional element for the stage 1 overcurrent protection;
[50/51P.En_VTS_Blk] is the logic setting of the function which can block all the OC protective
3.4.5 Harmonic Blocking Element for Overcurrent Protection

To prevent maloperation of the overcurrent protection when the transformer is energized without
any load, this relay provides a 2nd harmonic blocking function for resolving such a problem.
The percent threshold of the 2 nd harmonic blocking element to the fundamental wave can be set
through the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2].
The harmonic blocking mode can be selected through the setting [50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk].
Harmonic Blocking Criterion

Setting Value
Phase A Phase B Phase C
1 Phase blocking Ia2/ Ia 1 > Ib2/ Ib 1 > Ic2/ Ic1 >
2 Cross blocking (Ia 2/ Ia 1 >) or (Ib2/ Ib1 >) or (Ic2 / Ic 1 >)
3 Ma ximum blocking Ma x(Ia 2, Ib2, Ic 2)/ Ia 1 > Ma x(Ia 2, Ib2, Ic 2)/ Ib 1 > Ma x(Ia 2, Ib2, Ic 2)/ Ic1 >
When the fundamental current is greater than the setting [50/51P.I_Rls_HmBlk], the harmonic

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
blocking element of the corresponding phase is released.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the harmonic blocking element of phase A for the
stage 1 overcurrent protection. The logic diagrams of the harmonic blocking elements of phase B
and phase C can be gotten on the analogy of this.
Imax > [50/51P.I_Rls_HmBlk]
|Ia2/Ia1| > [50/51P.K_Hm2] 1

|Ib2/Ib1| > [50/51P.K_Hm2]
2
|Ic2/Ic1| > [50/51P.K_Hm2] & 50/51P1.HmBlk_A
|Imax2/Ia1| > [50/51P.K_Hm2] 3
[50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk]
[50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk]
Figure 3.4-8 Logic diagram of the OC1 phase A harmonic blocking element
Where:
[50/51P1.En_HarmBlk] is the logic setting of the harmonic blocking element of the stage 1
overcurrent protection;
[50/51P.K_Hm2] is the percent setting of the harmonic blocking element for OC protection;
[50/51P.I_Rls_HmBlk] is the current setting for releasing the harmonic blocking element;
[50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk] is the setting for selecting the harmonic blocking criterion;
“Ix1 ” (x: a, b or c) is the fundamental current; “Ix2 ” (x: a, b or c) is the 2 nd harmonic current;
“Imax” is the maximum phase current; “Imax2 ” is the maximum 2 nd harmonic current.
3.4.6 Overcurrent Protection Settings

All the settings of the overcurrent protection are listed in following table. For the information about
the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

The voltage s etting of the negative sequence
1 50/51P.U2_VCE 2~70V 0.001V
voltage blocking element (phase voltage)
The voltage setting of the low voltage blocking
2 50/51P.Upp_VCE 2~120V 0.001V
element (phase-to-phase voltage)
The relay characteristic angle for the directional
3 50/51P.RCA -180°~179° 1°
overcurrent protection
The logic setting of the function which can block
4 50/51P.En_VTS_Blk the OC protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
when the voltage transformer is failed
The percent setting of the harmonic blocking
5 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.05~1.00 0.001
element for OC protection
The current setting for releasing the harmonic
6 50/51P.I_Rls_HmBlk 0.05In~30In 0.001A
blocking element of the OC protection

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
The setting is used to select the harmonic

7 50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk 1~3 1
blocking mode of the OC protection
The current s etting of the stage 1 overcurrent
8 50/51P1.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
The time setting of the stage 1 overcurrent
9 50/51P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The logic setting of the voltage control element for
10 50/51P1.En_VCE 0~1 1
the stage 1 overcurrent protection
The setting is used to select the directional mode
11 50/51P1.Opt_Dir for the stage 1 overcurrent protection, see Section 0~2 1
3.4.4
The logic setting of the harmonic blocking element
12 50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
for the stage 1 overcurrent protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 overcurrent
13 50/51P1.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the stage 1 0x0000 ~
14 50/51P1.OutMap 1
overcurrent protection 0x3FFF
15 50/51P2.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
16 50/51P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
17 50/51P2.En_VCE 0~1 1
3.4.4
19 50/51P2.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
20 50/51P2.En 0~1 1
protection
21 50/51P2.OutMap 1
22 50/51P3.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
23 50/51P3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
24 50/51P3.En_VCE 0~1 1
3.4.4
26 50/51P3.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

27 50/51P3.En 0~1 1
protection
28 50/51P3.OutMap 1
The setting is for selecting the inverse time
29 50/51P3.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for OC3 protection
The time multiplier setting of the stage 3 ID MT
30 50/51P3.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
The minimum operation time setting of the stage 3
31 50/51P3.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
IDMT o vercurrent protection
Constant “k” for the stage 3 ID MT o vercurrent
32 50/51P3.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
protection, see Section 3.4.2
Constant “C” for the stage 3 IDMT overcurrent
33 50/51P3.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the stage 3 IDMT o vercurrent
34 50/51P3.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
35 50/51P4.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
36 50/51P4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
37 50/51P4.En_VCE 0~1 1
3.4.4
39 50/51P4.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
40 50/51P4.En 0~1 1
protection
41 50/51P4.OutMap 1
42 50/51P4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
43 50/51P4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
44 50/51P4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
45 50/51P4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
46 50/51P4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
47 50/51P4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

48 50/51P5.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
49 50/51P5.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
50 50/51P5.En 0~1 1
protection
51 50/51P6.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
52 50/51P6.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
53 50/51P6.En 0~1 1
protection
3.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection
3.5.1 Definite Time Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The zero sequence overcurrent protection in this relay provides a six-stage zero sequence
overcurrent protections with independent definite time delay characteristics. Each stage can be
enabled or disabled independently by the corresponding logic setting respectively. The first four
stages can be controlled with the directional element and harmonic blocking element respectively.
The last two stages are pure zero sequence overcurrent protections.
The zero sequence current of the zero sequence overcurrent protection can be led from a
dedicated zero sequence current transformer or be self-calculated (by the setting [Opt_3I0]).
When this relay is used in non-effective grounding (such as the delta side of a transformer) or
small current grounding system, the grounding zero sequence current during earth fault is
basically small capacitive current. Correct selection of faulty phase in zero sequence protection
can not be ensured by detection of such a current. Since all protection equipments are connected
with each other via network and information resource can be shared in the substation automation
system, so the faulty feeder can be identified firstly by comparing information from various feeders
which are connected to the same busbar and then decided finally by trial tripping of the circuit
breaker of the selected feeder. In this case, the zero sequence current has to be led from a zero
sequence current transformer.
When this relay is used in small resistance grounding system, the grounding zero sequence
current during earth fault is larger and can be used for tripping directly. All stages are equipped for
the zero sequence current protection. In this case, the zero sequence current for tripping can be
calculated or directly led from a zero sequence current transformer.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the zero sequence protection.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
I0 > [50/51G1.3I0_Set]
50/51G1.Dir & [50/51G1.St]
50/51G1.HmBlk
tROC1 0
[50/51G1.En] & [50/51G1.Op]
[50/51G1.En1]
[50/51G1.Blk]
I0 > [50/51G2.3I0_Set]
50/51G2.Dir & [50/51G2.St]
50/51G2.HmBlk
tROC2 0
[50/51G2.En] & [50/51G2.Op]
[50/51G2.En1]
[50/51G2.Blk]
I0 > [50/51G3.3I0_Set]
50/51G3.Dir & [50/51G3.St]
50/51G3.HmBlk
[50/51G3.En] tROC3 0
& [50/51G3.Op]
[50/51G3.En1]
[50/51G3.Opt_Curve] = 0
[50/51G3.Blk]
I0 > [50/51G4.3I0_Set]
50/51G4.Dir & [50/51G4.St]
50/51G4.HmBlk
[50/51G4.En] tROC4 0
& [50/51G4.Op]
[50/51G4.En1]
[50/51G4.Opt_Curve] = 0
[50/51G4.Blk]
I0 > [50/51G5.3I0_Set] [50/51G5.St]

[50/51G5.En] tROC5 0
& [50/51G5.Op]
[50/51G5.En1]
[50/51G5.Blk]
I0 > [50/51G6.3I0_Set] [50/51G6.St]

[50/51G6.En] tROC6 0
& [50/51G6.Op]
[50/51G6.En1]
[50/51G6.Blk]
Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of the zero sequence overcurrent protection
Where:
[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] (x: 1~6) is the current setting of the stage x (x: 1~6) zero sequence
“tROCx ” (x: 1~6) is the setting [50/51Gx.t_Op] (x: 1~6), the time setting of the stage x (x: 1~6)
zero sequence overcurrent protection;
[50/51Gx.En] (x: 1~6) is the logic setting of the stage x (x: 1~6) zero sequence overcurrent
protection;
[50/51Gx.En1] (x: 1~6) is the binary signal for enabling the stage x (x: 1~6) zero sequence
[50/51Gx.Blk] (x: 1~6) is the binary signal for blocking the stage x (x: 1~6) zero sequence
[50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] (x: 3~4) is the setting for selecting the inverse time characteristic curve;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
“50/51Gx.Dir” (x: 1~4) denotes the status of the zero sequence directional element, see
Section 3.5.3 for more details about the directional element;
“50/51Gx.HmBlk” (x: 1~4) denotes the status of the harmonic blocking element, see Section
3.5.4 for more details about the harmonic blocking element.
3.5.2 IDMT Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection

The stage 3 and 4 zero sequence overcurrent protections also can be used as zero sequence
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. They have the same inverse time
characteristic with the IDMT overcurrent protection (see Section 3.4.2), and the setting
[50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] (x: 3 or 4) can be used to select the expected curve.
The logic diagram of the stage 4 zero sequence IDMT overcurrent protection is shown as below.
The zero sequence overcurrent block is a level detector that detects whether the current
magnitude is above the threshold.
I0 > [50/51G4.3I0_Set]
50/51G4.Dir & [50/51G4.St]
50/51G4.HmBlk
[50/51G4.En] IDMT
& [50/51G4.Op]
[50/51G4.En1]
[50/51G4.Opt_Curve] = 0
[50/51G4.Blk]
Figure 3.5-2 Logic diagram of the stage 4 zero sequence IDMT overcurrent protection
Where:
[50/51G4.3I0_Set] is the current setting of the stage 4 ROC protection;
[50/51G4.En] is the logic setting of the stage 4 ROC protection;
[50/51G4.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 4 ROC protection;
[50/51G4.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 4 ROC protection;
[50/51G4.Opt_Curve] is the setting for selecting the inverse time characteristic curve;
“50/51G4.Dir” denotes the status of the zero sequence directional element for the stage 4
zero sequence overcurrent protection, see Section 3.5.3 for more details about the directional
element;
“50/51G4.HmBlk” denotes the status of the harmonic blocking element for the stage 4 zero
sequence overcurrent protection, see Section 3.5.4 for more details about the harmonic
blocking element.
The stage 3 zero sequence overcurrent protections has the same logic diagram with the stage 4
zero sequence overcurrent protection, but the operation threshold is its own setting threshold.
3.5.3 Directional Element for Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection

The residual voltage is used to polarize the directional earth fault (DEF) protection. With earth

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
fault protection, the polarizing signal is required to be a representative of the earth fault condition.
As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to
polarize DEF elements.
This relay internally derives this voltage from the 3-phase voltage input that must be supplied from
three single-phase voltage transformers. These types of VT design allow the passage of residual
flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual voltage. In addition, the
primary star point of the VT must be earthed. It is possible that small levels of residual voltage will
be present under normal system conditions due to system imbalances, VT inaccuracies, relay
tolerances etc.
The zero sequence relay characteristic angle (ZS_RCA) is configurable through the setting
[50/51G.RCA]. A directional check is performed based on the following criteria:
-90°< (angle(U0) - angle(I01) - ZS-RCA) < 90°
90°< (angle(U0) - angle(I01) - ZS-RCA) < 270°
Reverse
O U0
ZS-RCA
I01
Forward
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of the ROC directional element
The setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage x (x:
1~4) zero sequence overcurrent protection respectively.
Setting Value 0 1 2
When the element is selected as directional, a VTS block option is available. When the relevant
setting is set as “1”, operation of the voltage transformer supervision (VTS) will block the stage if
the relevant directional element is in service. When the relevant setting is set as “0”, the stage will
revert to non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
The detailed logic diagram of the zero sequence directional element of the stage 1 zero sequence
overcurrent protection is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[50/51G.En_VTS_Blk]
[VTS.En]
[VTS.Alm]
&
U0 (present measure) Zero Sequence
Direction Check 50/51G1.Dir
I0 (present measure)
[50/51G1.Opt_Dir] ≠ 0
Figure 3.5-4 Logic diagram of the directional element for the ROC1 protection
Where:
[50/51G1.Opt_Dir] is the setting which is used to select the directional mode (non -directional,
forward, reverse) of the directional element for the stage 1 ROC protection;
[50/51G.En_VTS_Blk] is the logic setting of the function which blocks all the ROC protective
3.5.4 Harmonic Blocking Element for ROC Protection
To prevent maloperation of the zero sequence overcurrent protection when the transformer is
nd
energized without any load, this relay provides a 2 harmonic blocking function for resolving such
a problem.
nd
The percent threshold of the 2 harmonic blocking element to the fundamental wave can be set
through the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2].
When the fundamental current is greater than the setting [50/51G.3I0_Rls_HmBlk], the harmonic
blocking element for the zero sequence overcurrent protection is released.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the harmonic blocking element for the stage 1
zero sequence overcurrent protection.
I01 > [50/51G.3I0_Rls_HmBlk]

|I02/I01| > [50/51G.K_Hm2] & 50/51G1.HmBlk
[50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk]
Figure 3.5-5 Logic diagram of the ROC1 harmonic blocking element
Where:
[50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk] is the logic setting of the harmonic blocking element;
[50/51G.K_Hm2] is the percent setting of the harmonic blocking element;
[50/51G.3I0_Rls_HmBlk] is the current setting for releasing the harmonic blocking element;
“I01” is the zero sequence fundamental current;
“I02 ” is the 2nd harmonic of the zero sequence current.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.5.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings
All the settings of the zero sequence overcurrent protection are listed in the following table. For
the information about the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

1 50/51G.RCA -180°~179° 1°
zero sequence overcurrent protection
The logic setting of the function which blocks the
2 50/51G.En_VTS_Blk ROC protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
3 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.05~1.00 0.001
element for the ROC protection
4 50/51G.3I0_Rls_HmBlk 0.05In~30In 0.001A
blocking element of the ROC protection
The current setting of the stage 1 zero sequence
5 50/51G1.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
The time setting of the stage 1 zero sequence
6 50/51G1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
7 50/51G1.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
for the ROC1 protection, see Section 3.5.3
8 50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
for the ROC1 protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 zero sequence
9 50/51G1.En 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the stage 1 zero 0x0000 ~
10 50/51G1.OutMap 1
sequence overcurrent protection 0x3FFF
11 50/51G2.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
12 50/51G2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
13 50/51G2.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
14 50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
15 50/51G2.En 0~1 1
16 50/51G2.OutMap 1
17 50/51G3.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
18 50/51G3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

19 50/51G3.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
20 50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
21 50/51G3.En 0~1 1
22 50/51G3.OutMap 1
23 50/51G3.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for the ROC3 protection
The time multiplier setting of the stage 3 zero
24 50/51G3.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
sequence IDMT o vercurrent protection
25 50/51G3.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
zero sequence IDMT overcurrent protection
Constant “k” for the stage 3 zero sequence IDMT
26 50/51G3.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
overcurrent protection, see Section 3.5.2
Constant “C” for the stage 3 zero sequence IDMT
27 50/51G3.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the stage 3 zero sequence IDMT
28 50/51G3.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
29 50/51G4.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
30 50/51G4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
31 50/51G4.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
32 50/51G4.En_Hm _Blk 0~1 1
33 50/51G4.En 0~1 1
34 50/51G4.OutMap 1
35 50/51G4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
36 50/51G4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
37 50/51G4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
38 50/51G4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
39 50/51G4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
40 50/51G4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

41 50/51G5.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
42 50/51G5.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
43 50/51G5.En 0~1 1
44 50/51G6.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
45 50/51G6.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
46 50/51G6.En 0~1 1
3.6 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
3.6.1 Definite Time Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
This relay provides a four-stage sensitive earth fault protection with independent definite time
delay characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled independently by the corresponding
logic setting respectively, and can be controlled by the directional element respectively. The stage
4 SEF also can be set with inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. Each stage can
be used for tripping or alarming through the PCS-Explorer and the default is for tripping.
When this relay is used in non-effective grounding (such as the delta side of a transformer) or
small current grounding system, the grounding zero sequence current during earth fault is
basically small capacitive current. Correct selection of faulty phase in zero se quence protection
can not be ensured by detection of such a current. One current transformer input is dedicated to
the sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection. The input CT is designed specially to operate at very low
current magnitudes.
The following figure shows the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection logic diagram, other stage
has the same logic diagram.
I0S > [50/51SEF1.3I0_Set]

[50/51SEF1.St]
50/51SEF1.Dir
tSEF1 0
[50/51SEF1.En] & [50/51SEF1.Op]
[50/51SEF1.En1]
[50/51SEF1.Blk]
Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram for the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection
Where:
[50/51SEF1.3I0_Set] is the current setting of the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection;
“tSEF1” is the setting [50/51SEF1.t_Op], the time setting of the SEF1 protection;
[50/51SEF1.En] is the logic setting of the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[50/51SEF1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection;
[50/51SEF1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection;
“50/51SEF1.Dir” denotes the status of the directional element for the stage 1 sensitive earth
fault protection, see Section 3.6.3 for more details about the directional element.
3.6.2 IDMT Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
The stage 4 sensitive earth fault protection also can be used as inverse definite minimum time
(IDMT) sensitive earth fault protection. It has the same inverse time characteristic with the IDMT
overcurrent protection (see Section 3.4.2), and the setting [50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve] can be used to
select the expected curve.
The logic diagram of the IDMT sensitive earth fault protection is shown as below. The sensitive
earth fault current block is a level detector that detects whether the current magnitude is above
the threshold.
I0S > [50/51SEF4.3I0_Set]

50/51SEF4.Dir [50/51SEF4.St]
[50/51SEF4.En] IDMT
& [50/51SEF4.Op]
[50/51SEF4.En1]
[50/51SEF4.Blk]
[50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve] = 0
Figure 3.6-2 Logic diagram of the IDMT sensitive earth fault protection
Where:
[50/51SEF4.3I0_Set] is the current setting of the stage 4 sensitive earth fault protection;
[50/51SEF4.En] is the logic setting of the stage 4 sensitive earth fault protection;
[50/51SEF4.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 4 sensitive earth fault protection;
[50/51SEF4.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 4 sensitive earth fault protection;
[50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve] is the setting for selecting the inverse time characteristic curve;
“50/51SEF4.Dir” denotes the status of the directional element for the stage 4 sensitive earth
fault protection, see Section 3.6.3 for more details about the directional element.
3.6.3 Directional Element for Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

The residual voltage is used to polarize the directional element for the SEF protection. With earth
fault protection, the polarizing signal is required to be a representative of the earth fault condition.
As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to
polarize directional elements. The residual voltage is also derived from the 3-phase voltage input,
which are same with the directional element for the zero sequence overcurrent protection.
The sensitive earth fault relay characteristic angle (SEF-RCA) is configurable through the setting
[50/51SEF.RCA]. A directional check is performed based on the following criteria:

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
-90°< (angle(U0) - angle(I0S) - SEF-RCA) < 90°
-90°> (angle(U0) - angle(I0S) - SEF-RCA) > 90°
Reverse
O U0
SEF-RCA
I0S
Forward
Figure 3.6-3 Operation characteristic of the SEF directional element
The setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage x (x:
1~4) sensitive earth fault protection respectively.
Setting Value 0 1 2
When the element is selected as directional, a VTS block option is available. When the relevant
setting is set as “1”, operation of the voltage transformer supervision (VTS) will block the stage if
the relevant directional element is in service. When the relevant setting is set as “0”, the stage will
revert to non-directional upon operation of the VTS.
The detailed logic diagram of the directional element of the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection
is shown as below.
[50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk]
[VTS.En]
[VTS.Alm]
&
U0 (present measure) SEF
Direction Check 50/51SEF1.Dir
I0S (present measure)
[50/51SEF1.Opt_Dir] ≠ 0
Figure 3.6-4 Logic diagram of the directional element for the stage 1 SEF protection
Where:
[50/51SEF1.Opt_Dir] is the setting which is used to select the directional mode

(non-directional, forward, reverse) of the directional element for the stage 1 SEF protection;
[50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk] is the logic setting of the function which can block all the SEF
protection that relate to the voltage measurement when the voltage transformer is failed;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.6.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Settings
All the settings of the sensitive earth fault protection are listed in the following table. For the
information about the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

1 50/51SEF.RCA -180°~179° 1°
sensitive earth fault protection
2 50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk SEF protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
The current setting of the stage 1 sensitive earth
3 50/51SEF1.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
The time setting of the stage 1 sensitive earth
4 50/51SEF1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
5 50/51SEF1.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
for the stage 1 SEF protection, see Section 3.6.3
The logic setting of the stage 1 sensitive earth
6 50/51SEF1.En 0~1 1
fault protection
The output matrix setting of the stage 1 sensitive 0x00000 ~
7 50/51SEF1.OutMap 1
earth fault protection 0xFFFFF
8 50/51SEF2.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
9 50/51SEF2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
10 50/51SEF2.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
11 50/51SEF2.En 0~1 1
fault protection
13 50/51SEF3.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
14 50/51SEF3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
15 50/51SEF3.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
16 50/51SEF3.En 0~1 1
fault protection
18 50/51SEF4.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

19 50/51SEF4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
20 50/51SEF4.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
21 50/51SEF4.En 0~1 1
fault protection
23 50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for SEF4 protection
The time multiplier setting of the IDMT sensitive
24 50/51SEF4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
earth fault protection
The minimum operation time setting of the IDMT
25 50/51SEF4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
Constant “k” for the IDMT sensitive earth fault
26 50/51SEF4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
Constant “C” for the IDMT sensitive earth fault
27 50/51SEF4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the ID MT sensitive earth fault
28 50/51SEF4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
3.7 Thermal Overload Protection
3.7.1 Thermal Overload Protection Theory
The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using load current to model heating and
cooling of the protected plant.
The heat generated within an item of the plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive
loss (Ι2R×t). Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The thermal time
characteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over time. The
relay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model.
Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load

rating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc.
This relay provides a thermal overload model which is based on the IEC60255-8 standard. The
thermal overload formulas are shown as below.
 Criterion of cooling start characteristic:
I2
T    ln
I 2  (k  I B ) 2
 Criterion of hot start characteristic:

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
I 2  I p2
T    ln
I 2  (k  I B ) 2
Where:
T = Time to trip (in seconds);
 = Thermal time constant of the equipment to be protected, the setting [49.Tau];
IB = Full load current rating, the setting [49.Ib_Set];
I = The RMS value of the largest phase current;
IP = Steady state pre-loading before application of the overload;
k = Factor associated to the thermal state formula, the setting [49.K_Trp] and [49.K_Alm].
The characteristic curve of thermal overload model is shown in Figure 3.7-1.
t Refer to IEC60255-8
Ip
P=—
IB
P = 0.0
P = 0.6
P = 0.8
P = 0.9
kIB I
Figure 3.7-1 Characteristic curve of the thermal overload model
The 1st ~ 7th harmonics of the phase current are taken into account in the calculation of the RMS
value of the largest phase current.
The input signal [49.Clr] (it can be led from a binary input of this relay) can clear the thermal
accumulation without blocking the thermal overload protection, if it is energized.
The thermal overload protection also can be used to issue an alarm signal [49.Alm], if the logic
setting [49.En_Alm] is set as “1”.
The logic diagram of the thermal overload protection is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Imax_rms > [49.K_Trp]×[49.Ib_Set]

[49.St]
[49.Blk] Thermal
[49.En1]
& Accumulator [49.Op]
CLR
[49.En_Trp]
[49.Clr]
Imax_rms > [49.K_Alm]×[49.Ib_Set]

Thermal
[49.Blk] & Accumulator [49.Alm]
CLR
[49.En_Alm]
[49.Clr]
Figure 3.7-2 Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection
Where:
“Imax_rms” is the maximum RMS phase current;
[49.K_Trp] is the factor setting of the thermal overload protection;
[49.Ib_Set] is the reference current setting of the thermal overload protection;
[49.K_Alm] is the factor setting of the thermal overload alarm element;
[49.En_Trp] is the logic setting of the thermal overload protection;
[49.En_Alm] is the logic setting of the thermal overload alarm element;
[49.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the thermal overload protection;
[49.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the thermal overload protection;
[49.Clr] is the binary signal for clearing the thermal accumulation.
3.7.2 Thermal Overload Protection Settings

All the settings of the thermal overload protection are listed in the following table. For the

The reference current s etting of the thermal
1 49.Ib_Set 0.05In~3.0In 0.001A
overload protection
The time constant s etting of the IDMT o verload
2 49.Tau 10~6000s 0.001s
protection
The factor setting of the thermal overload
3 49.K_Trp protection which is associated to the thermal state 1.0~3.0 0.001
formula
The factor setting of the thermal overload alarm
4 49.K_Alm element which is associated to the thermal state 0.5~3.0 0.001
formula
The logic setting of the thermal overload
5 49.En_Trp 0~1 1
protection for tripping

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

6 49.En_Alm 0~1 1
protection for alarming
The output matrix setting of the thermal overload 0x0000 ~
7 49.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
3.8 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
3.8.1 Definite Time Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The application of negative sequence overcurrent protection to motors has a special significance.
Unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in three-phase induction motors, which act on the
rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are induced on the rotor surface, which causes local
overheating in rotor end zones and the slot wedges. This especially goes for motors which are
tripped via vacuum contactors with fuses connected in series. With single phasing due to
operation of a fuse, the motor only generates small and pulsing torques such that it soon is
thermally strained assuming that the torque required by the machine remains unchanged. In
addition, the unbalanced supply voltage introduces the risk of thermal overload. Due to the small
negative sequence reactance even small voltage asymmetries lead to large negative sequence
currents.
This relay provides a two-stage negative sequence overcurrent protection with definite time delay
characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled by scheme logic settings independently.
The two stages have same protection logics if they are set with definite time characteristics.
The logic diagram for the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection is shown as below.
The negative sequence overcurrent block is a level detector that detects whether the negative
sequence current magnitude is above the threshold.
I2 > [50/51Q1.I2_Set] [50/51Q1.St]

[50/51Q1.En] tNOC1 0
& [50/51Q1.Op]
[50/51Q1.En1]
[50/51Q1.Blk]
Figure 3.8-1 Logical diagram of the stage 2 NOC protection
Where:
[50/51Q1.I2_Set] is the current setting of the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent

protection;
“tNOC1” is the setting [50/51Q1.t_Op], the time setting of the stage 1 negative sequence
[50/51Q1.En] is the logic setting of the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection;
[50/51Q1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the NOC1 protection;
[50/51Q1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the NOC1 protection.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.8.2 IDMT Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
The stage 2 negative sequence overcurrent protection also can be set with inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) characteristic. It has the same inverse time characteristic with the IDMT
overcurrent protection (see Section 3.4.2), and the setting [50/51Q2.Opt_Curve] can be used to
select the expected curve.
The logic diagram of the negative sequence overcurrent protection is shown as below. The
negative sequence current block is a level detector that detects whether the current magnitude is
above the threshold.
I2 > [50/51Q2.I2_Set]
[50/51Q2.St]
[50/51Q2.En]
IDMT
[50/51Q2.En1] & [50/51Q2.Op]
[50/51Q2.Blk]
[50/51Q2.Opt_Curve] = 0
Figure 3.8-2 Logic diagram of the IDMT negative sequence overcurrent protection
Where:
[50/51Q2.I2_Set] is the current setting of the stage 2 negative sequence overcurrent

protection;
[50/51Q2.En] is the logic setting of the stage 2 negative sequence overcurrent protection;
[50/51Q2.Opt_Curve] is the setting for selecting the inverse time characteristic curve;
[50/51Q2.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the NOC2 protection;
[50/51Q2.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the NOC2 protection.
3.8.3 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings

All the settings of the negative sequence overcurrent protection are listed in the following table.
For the information about the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

The current s etting of the stage 1 negative
1 50/51Q1.I2_Set 0.05In~4In 0.001A
sequence overcurrent protection
The time setting of the stage 1 negative sequence
2 50/51Q1.t_Op 0.03~100s 0.001s
The logic setting of the stage 1 negative sequence
3 50/51Q1.En 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the stage 1 negative 0x0000 ~
4 50/51Q1.OutMap 1
5 50/51Q2.I2_Set 0.05In~4In 0.001A
6 50/51Q2.t_Op 0.03~100s 0.001s

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

7 50/51Q2.En 0~1 1
8 50/51Q2.OutMap 1
9 50/51Q2.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for the NOC2 protection
The time multiplier setting of the negative
10 50/51Q2.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
The minimum operation time setting of the
11 50/51Q2.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
negative sequence IDMT overcurrent protection
Constant “k” for the negative sequence IDMT
12 50/51Q2.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
Constant “C” for the negative sequence IDMT
13 50/51Q2.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the negative sequence IDMT
14 50/51Q2.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
3.9 Broken Conductor Protection
3.9.1 Broken Conductor Protection Theory
The relay incorporates an element which measures the ratio of negative to positive sequence
current (Ι2/Ι1). This will be affected to a lesser extent than the measurement of negative sequence
current alone, since the ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current. Hence, a
more sensitive setting may be achieved.
At the moment when the circuit breaker is closed, because the three poles of the circuit breaker
are discrepant for a very short time, and if the broken conductor protection is enabled, it is easy to
make the broken conductor protection pick up, and it will restore after the load current is stable.
The logic diagram is as shown below. The ratio of I2/I1 is calculated and is compared with the
threshold and if the threshold is exceeded then the delay timer is initiated.
I2/I1 > [50BC.I2/I1_Set]

[50BC.St]
[50BC.En] tBCP 0
& [50BC.Op]
[50BC.En1]
[50BC.Blk]
Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of the broken conductor protection
Where:
[50BC.I2/I1_Set] is the ratio setting of the broken conductor protection;
“tBCP” is the setting [50BC.t_Op], the time setting of the broken conductor protection;
[50BC.En] is the logic setting of the broken conductor protection;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[50BC.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the broken conductor protection;
[50BC.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the broken conductor protection.
3.9.2 Broken Conductor Protection Settings
All the settings of the broken conductor protection are listed in the following table. For the

The ratio setting for the broken conductor
1 50BC.I2/I1_Set 0.10~1.00 0.001
protection
The time setting for the broken conductor
2 50BC.t_Op 0~200s 0.001s
protection
The logic setting for the broken conductor
3 50BC.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the broken conductor 0x0000 ~
4 50BC.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
3.10 Breaker Failure Protection
3.10.1 Breaker Failure Protection Theory

The circuit breaker failure protection is specially applied for re-tripping the circuit breaker, when
the relay has transmitted the tripping command to the circuit breaker, but the fault is still existed in
the system or the circuit breaker is still closed after an appointed time delay.
The breaker failure protection in this relay has two independent definite time delay characteristics.
It is controlled by the initiation signal “50BF.In_Init” (it can be an external binary input trigger signal)
or a relay tripping operation signal). The signal “50BF.In_Init” can be configured through the
PCS-Explorer configuration tool software.
For some special faults (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe the faulty current is very small and the current criterion of the breaker failure protection can
not be satisfied, in order to make the breaker failure protection can operate in such a situation, the
auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker can be taken into account. So this relay provides four
criteria logics to meet different requirements.
Four criteria logics based on the phase currents and the circuit breaker state (based on the binary
input [BI_52b]) are selectable through the setting [50BF.Opt_LogicMode]. The criteria conditions
are list as below: (A) the phase current is greater than the setting [50BF.I_Set]; (B) the circuit
breaker is still closed ([BI_52b] = 0).
Setting Value Criteria Condition Logic

1 Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set] Only A
2 NOT([BI_52b]) Only B
3 (Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set]) OR (NOT([BI_52b])) A OR B
4 (Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set]) AND (NOT([BI_52b])) A AND B

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
The logic diagram of the breaker failure protection is shown as below.
Ia > [50BF.I_Set] 1 ONLY A

Ib > [50BF.I_Set] A 2 ONLY B
Ic > [50BF.I_Set] 3 A OR B
[BI_52b] B 4 A AND B [50BF.St]
[50BF.Opt_LogicMode]
tBFP1 0
50BF.In_Init & [50BF.Op]
[50BF.En]
[50BF.En1]
tBFP2 0
[50BF.Blk] & [50BF.ReTrp]
[50BF.En_ReTrp]
Figure 3.10-1 Logic diagram of the breaker failure protection
Where:
[50BF.I_Set] is the current setting of the breaker failure protection;
“tBFP1” is the setting [50BF.t_Op], the time setting of the breaker failure protection;
“tBFP2” is the setting [50BF.t_ReTrp] is the re-trip time setting of the breaker failure protection;
[50BF.En] is the logic setting of the breaker failure protection;
[50BF.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the breaker failure protection;
[50BF.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the breaker failure protection;
[50BF.En_ReTrp] is the logic setting of re-trip function the breaker failure protection;
[50BF.Opt_LogicMode] is the setting for selecting the BFP criterion logic;
“50BF.In_Init” is the initiation signal such as the external binary input trigger signal or the relay
tripping operation signal, and it can be configured through the PCS-Explorer configuration
tool auxiliary software.
The time setting of the breaker failure protection should be based on the maximum circuit breaker
operating time plus the dropout time of the current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin
which takes into consideration the tolerance of the time delay.
System Fault
Normal Fault Clearance Time
Protection Trip Time CB Open Time Reset CB I> Safety Margin
50BF Time Delay CB Open Time

Adjacent CBs
Initiation 50BF
Total Fault Clearance Time with 50BF
Figure 3.10-2 Timing for a typical breaker failure scenario

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.10.2 Breaker Failure Protection Settings
All the settings of the breaker failure protection are listed in the following table. For the information

The current s etting of the breaker failure
1 50BF.I_Set 0.05In~5.0In 0.001A
protection
2 50BF.t_Op The time setting of the breaker failure protection 0~100s 0.001s
The re-trip time setting of the breaker failure
3 50BF.t_ReTrp 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The setting for selecting the criteria logic of the
4 50BF.Opt_LogicMode 1~4 1
breaker failure protection
5 50BF.En The logic setting of the breaker failure protection 0~1 1
The logic setting of the re-trip function of the
6 50BF.En_ReTrp 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the breaker failure 0x0000 ~
7 50BF.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
The output matrix setting of the re-trip function of 0x0000 ~
8 50BF.OutMap_ReTrp 1
the breaker failure protection 0x3FFF
3.11 Switch Onto Fault (SOTF) Protection
3.11.1 SOTF Protection Theory
In some feeder applications, three-pole fast tripping may be required if a fault is present on the
feeder when it is energized. Such faults may be due to a fault condition not having been removed
from the feeder, or due to earthing clamps having been left on the following maintenance. In either
case, it may be desirable to clear the fault condition in an accelerated time, rather than waiting for
the time delay associated with overcurrent protection.
Switch onto fault overcurrent protection and zero sequence accelerated overcurrent protection are
equipped in this equipment. Acceleration before or after tripping can be configured by setting the
logic setting [SOTF.Opt_Mode]. Acceleration after tripping includes accelerated tripping for
manual switching-onto-fault or automatic reclosing-onto-fault. Current settings and delays of
these two accelerated tripping protections can be configured independently.
If acceleration after tripping is selected, the SOTF element is enabled for the predefined time
[SOTF.t_En] after the auto-recloser operates. And the SOTF element is enabled for the
predefined time [SOTF.t_En] fixedly after manual closing signal is issued, and the typical value is
“3s”.
The logic diagram of the switch onto fault protection is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Ia > [50PSOTF.I_SetF]
Ib > [50PSOTF.I_SetF]
Ic > [50PSOTF.I_SetF]
[50PSOTF.En] & [50PSOTF.St]
[50PSOTF.En1]
tSOTFOC 0
[50PSOTF.Blk] & [50PSOTF.Op]
[79.Ready]
[SOTF.Opt_Mode]
&
0 tEnSOTF
[79.Close_3PSx] (x:1~4)
&
[50GSOTF.St]
SOTF.ManClsCB
0 tEnSOTF
tSOTFROC 0
I01 > [50GSOTF.3I0_Set] & [50GSOTF.Op]
[50GSOTF.En]
&
[50GSOTF.En1]
[50GSOTF.Blk]
Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of the SOTF protection
Where:
[50PSOTF.I_Set] is the current setting of the SOTF overcurrent protection;
“tSOTFOC ” is the setting [50PSOTF.t_Op], the time setting of the SOTF overcurrent protection;
[50PSOTF.En] is the logic setting of the SOTF overcurrent protection;
[50PSOTF.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the SOTF overcurrent protection;
[50PSOTF.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the SOTF overcurrent protection;
[50GSOTF.3I0_Set] is the current setting of the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection;
“tSOTFROC ” is the setting [50GSOTF.t_Op], the time setting of the zero sequence SOTF
[50GSOTF.En] is the logic setting of the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection;
[50GSOTF.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent
protection;
[50GSOTF.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent
protection;
[SOTF.Opt_Mode] is the setting for selecting the acceleration mode of the SOTF protection;
“tEnSOTF ” is the setting [SOTF.t_En], the enabling time setting of the SOTF protection;
[79.Ready] is used to denote the auto-recloser is ready for operating;
[79.Close_3PSx] (x:1~4) means that the auto-recloser operates;
“SOTF.ManClsCB” denotes the circuit breaker is closed manually (local or remote), f or

example, the circuit breaker is closed by the remote closing command from the SAS or
SCADA, or by pressing the closing button on the control panel.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.11.2 SOTF Protection Settings
All the settings of the SOTF protection are listed in the following table. For the information about
the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

1 SOTF.t_En The enabling time setting of the SOTF protection 0~100s 0.001s
The setting for s electing the acceleration tripping
2 SOTF.Opt_ Mode 0~1 1
mode of the SOTF protection
The current s etting of the SOTF o vercurrent
3 50PSOTF.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
The time setting of the SOTF overcurrent
4 50PSOTF.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The logic s etting of the SOTF o vercurrent
5 50PSOTF.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the SOTF o vercurrent 0x0000 ~
6 50PSOTF.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
The current setting of the zero sequence SOTF
7 50GSOTF.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
The time setting of the zero sequence SOTF
8 50GSOTF.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
The logic setting of the zero sequence SOTF
9 50GSOTF.En 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the zero sequence 0x0000 ~
10 50GSOTF.OutMap 1
SOTF o vercurrent protection 0x3FFF
3.12 Undervoltage Protection
3.12.1 Undervoltage Protection Theory
This relay provides a two-stage undervoltage protection with definite time delay characteristics.
The two stages have same protection logics. Each stage can be used for tripping or alarming
through the PCS-Explorer and the default is for tripping.
This protection can support all kinds of VT connection: three phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc), three
phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc, Uca), two phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc), anyone of
three phase voltages or anyone of three phase-to-phase voltages.
Two methods are used to check the undervoltage condition by the setting [27P.Opt_1P/3P]. If
setting [27P.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “0”, and all of the three voltage values are less than the voltage
setting, the undervoltage protection will operates after the appointed time delay; and if the setting
[27P.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “1”, and anyone of the three voltage values is less than the voltage
setting, the undervoltage protection will operates after the appointed time delay.
The setting [27P.Opt_Up/Upp] is used to decide the voltage input mode. If it is set as “1”, the input
voltage is phase-to-phase voltage; and if it is set as “0”, the input voltage is phase voltage. So the

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
voltage setting must be set in accordance with the setting [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]; i.e. if the setting
[27P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as “1”, the voltage setting is set according to phase-to-phase voltage;
and if the setting [27P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as “0”, the voltage setting is set according to phase
voltage.
The circuit breaker state (based on the binary input [BI_52b]) is taken into account in the
undervoltage protection logic; when the circuit breaker is opened ([BI_52b ] = 1), the undervoltage
protection is not in service.
If the system voltage is lost, the undervoltage protection is blocked. The criterion of the system
voltage lost detects that all the three phase voltages are less than 15V, and the load current can
be taken into account according to the application demands through [27P1.OnLoad] which
denotes whether there has load current (anyone of the three phase currents is greater than
0.04In). The signal [27P1.OnLoad] can be from the signal “Prot.OnLoad” through PCS-Explorer.
[27P1.OnLoad]
20ms 0
Ua < 15V & 27P1.LostVolt
Ub < 15V &
Uc < 15V
Figure 3.12-1 Logic diagram of the system lost voltage for the UV1 protection
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the stage 1 undervoltage protection.
Uab < [27P1.U_Set]

Ubc < [27P1.U_Set] & &
Uca < [27P1.U_Set]
Uab < [27P1.U_Set]
Ubc < [27P1.U_Set] &
Uca < [27P1.U_Set]
[27P.Opt_1P/3P]
[27P.Opt_Up/Upp]
Ua < [27P1.U_Set]
Ub < [27P1.U_Set] & &
Uc < [27P1.U_Set] [27P1.St]
Ua < [27P1.U_Set]
Ub < [27P1.U_Set] & & tUV1 0
[27P1.Op]
Uc < [27P1.U_Set]
[BI_52b]
27P1.LostVolt
[27P1.En]
[27P1.En1]
[27P1.Blk]
Figure 3.12-2 Logic diagram of the stage 1 undervoltage protection
Where:
[27P1.U_Set] is the voltage setting of the stage 1 undervoltage protection;
“tUV1” is the setting [27P1.t_Op], the time setting of the stage 1 undervoltage prote ction;
[27P.Opt_1P/3P] is the logic setting for selecting the undervoltage calculation method;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[27P.Opt_Up/Upp] is the logic setting for deciding the voltage input mode;
[27P1.En] is the logic setting of the stage 1 undervoltage protection ;
[27P1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 1 undervoltage protection;
[27P1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 1 undervoltage protection;
“27P1.LostVolt” denotes whether the system voltage is lost.
3.12.2 Undervoltage Protection Settings
All the settings of the undervoltage protections are listed in the following table. For the information

The setting for s electing the undervoltage
1 27P.Opt_1P/3P 0~1 1
protection calculation method
The setting for selecting the voltage input mode
2 27P.Opt_Up/Upp 0~1 1
for the undervoltage protection
The voltage setting of the stage 1 undervoltage
3 27P1.U_Set 2~120V 0.001V
protection
The time setting of the stage 1 undervoltage
4 27P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the stage 1
5 27P1.K_DropOut 1.01~3.0 0.001
undervoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 undervoltage
6 27P1.En 0~1 1
protection
7 27P1.OutMap 1
undervoltage protection 0x3FFF
8 27P2.U_Set 2~120V 0.001V
protection
9 27P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
10 27P2.K_DropOut 1.01~3.0 0.001
11 27P2.En 0~1 1
protection
12 27P2.OutMap 1
If the voltage is greater than [27Px.U_Set]×[27Px.K_DropOut] (x: 1~2), the corresponding

undervoltage protection will drop out. The dropout coefficient [27Px.K_DropOut] (x: 1~2) for
setting the dropout value of the corresponding undervoltage protection, and its typical value is
“1.03”.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.13 Overvoltage Protection
3.13.1 Overvoltage Protection Theory

This relay provides a two-stage overvoltage protection with definite time delay characteristics. The
two stages have same protection logics. Each stage can be used for tripping or alarming through
the PCS-Explorer and the default is for tripping.
This protection can support all kinds of VT connection: three phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc), thr ee
phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc, Uca), two phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc), anyone of
three phase voltages or anyone of three phase-to-phase voltages.
Two methods are used to check the overvoltage condition by the setting [59P.Opt_1P/3P]. If
setting [59P.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “0”, and all of the three voltage values are greater than the
voltage setting, the overvoltage protection will operates after the appointed time delay; and if the
setting [59P.Opt_1P/3P] is set as “1”, and anyone of the three voltage values is greater than the
voltage setting, the overvoltage protection will operates after the appointed time delay.
The setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is used to decide the voltage input mode. If it is set as “1”, the input
voltage is phase-to-phase voltage; and if it is set as “0”, the input voltage is phase voltage. So the
voltage setting must be set in accordance with the setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]; i.e. if the setting
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as “1”, the voltage setting is set according to phase-to-phase voltage;
and if the setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as “0”, the voltage setting is set according to phase
voltage.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the stage 1 overvoltage protection.
Uab > [59P1.U_Set]

Ubc > [59P1.U_Set] & &
Uca > [59P1.U_Set]
Uab > [59P1.U_Set]
Ubc > [59P1.U_Set] &
Uca > [59P1.U_Set]
[59P.Opt_1P/3P]
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp]
Ua > [59P1.U_Set]
Ub > [59P1.U_Set] & & [59P1.St]
Uc > [59P1.U_Set]
Ua > [59P1.U_Set] tOV1 0
& [59P1.Op]
Ub > [59P1.U_Set] &
Uc > [59P1.U_Set]
[59P1.En]
[59P1.En1]
[59P1.Blk]
Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of the stage 1 overvoltage protection
Where:
[59P1.U_Set] is the voltage setting of the stage 1 overvoltage protection;
“tOV1” is the setting [59P1.t_Op], the time setting of the stage 1 overvoltage protection;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[59P.Opt_1P/3P] is the logic setting for selecting the overvoltage calculation method;
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is the logic setting for deciding the voltage input mode;
[59P1.En] is the logic setting of the stage 1 overvoltage protection ;
[59P1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the stage 1 overvoltage protection;
[59P1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the stage 1 overvoltage protection.
3.13.2 Overvoltage Protection Settings

All the settings of the overvoltage and undervoltage protections are listed in the following table.
For the information about the common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

The setting for s electing the overvoltage
1 59P.Opt_1P/3P 0~1 1
for the overvoltage protection
The voltage setting of the stage 1 overvoltage
3 59P1.U_Set 57.7~200V 0.001V
protection
The time setting of the stage 1 overvoltage
4 59P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
5 59P1.K_DropOut 0.93~0.99 0.001
overvoltage protection
The logic setting of the stage 1 overvoltage
6 59P1.En 0~1 1
protection
7 59P1.OutMap 1
overvoltage protection 0x3FFF
8 59P2.U_Set 57.7~200V 0.001V
protection
9 59P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
10 59P2.K_DropOut 0.93~0.99 0.001
11 59P2.En 0~1 1
protection
12 59P2.OutMap 1
If the voltage is less than [59Px.U_Set]×[59Px.K_DropOut] (x: 1~2), the corresponding

overvoltage protection will drop out. The dropout coefficient [59Px.K_DropOut] (x: 1~2) for setting
the dropout value of the corresponding overvoltage protection, and its typical value is “0.97”.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3.14 Mechanical Protection
3.14.1 Mechanical Protection Theory

This relay can provide up to 4 programmable binary inputs for mechanical protection. If a binary
input which is used as a mechanical protection input is energized, this relay will issue an operation
signal after a predefined time delay.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the No.1 mechanical protection. Other mechanical
protections have the same functional logic with the No.1 mechanical protection.
[MR1.Input] [MR1.St]
[MR1.En] tMR1 0
& [MR1.Op]
[MR1.En1]
[MR1.Blk]
Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of the No.1 mechanical protection
Where:
[MR1.Input] is the mechanical protection input signal which can be from a binary input;
“tMR1” is the setting [MR1.t_Op], the time setting of the No.1 mechanical protection;
[MR1.En] is the logic setting of the No.1 mechanical protection;
[MR1.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the No.1 mechanical protection;
[MR1.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the No.1 mechanical protection.
3.14.2 Mechanical Protection Settings
All the settings of the mechanical protection are listed in the following table. For the information

The time setting of the No.1 mechanical
1 MR1.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
The logic setting of the No.1 mechanical
2 MR1.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the No.1 mechanical 0x0000 ~
3 MR1.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
4 MR2.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
5 MR2.En 0~1 1
protection
6 MR2.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

7 MR3.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
8 MR3.En 0~1 1
protection
9 MR3.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
10 MR4.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
11 MR4.En 0~1 1
protection
12 MR4.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
3.15 Auto-recloser
3.15.1 Auto-recloser Theory
This relay can support up to 4-shot auto-recloser. This relay will initiate the auto-recloser for fault
clearance by the phase overcurrent protection, the earth fault protection etc. (which can be
configured through PCS-Explorer). An auto-reclosing cycle can be internally initiated by operation
of a protection element or externally by a separate protection device, provided the circuit breaker
(CB) is closed until the instant of protection operation. At the end of the dead time of each shot, if
all the auto-reclosing conditions are satisfied, a circuit breaker close signal is given. The
auto-reclosing output time pulse width is configurable through the setting [79.t_DDO_AR].
The system conditions to be met for closing are that the system voltages are in synchronism or
dead line/live busbar or live line/dead busbar conditions exist, indicated by the internal check
synchronism element and that the circuit breaker closing spring, or other energy source, is fully
charged indicated from the binary input [BI_LowPres_Cls]. The CB close signal is cut-off when the
circuit breaker is closed.
If the CB position check function is enabled (the setting [79.En_FailChk] is set as “1”), the
auto-recloser detects the CB position in the period [79.t_Fail] after the auto-reclosing command is
issued. If the CB closed position condition is not met in the period [79.t_Fail], the auto -recloser
can not operate successfully, and the signal [79.Fail] will be issued.
When the auto-reclosing command is issued, the reclaim timer starts. If the circuit breaker does
not trip again, the auto-recloser resets at the end of the reclaim time. If the protection operates
during the reclaim time delay [79.t_Reclaim], this relay either advances to the next shot in the
programmed auto-reclosing cycle, or it goes to lockout if all programmed reclose attempts have
been made. The reclaim time should be set long enough to allow this relay to operate when the
circuit breaker is automatically closed onto a fault.
If any blocking condition is met in the process of the auto-recloser, the auto-recloser will be
blocked at once. And if any shot of the auto-recloser can not operate successfully, the signal
[79.Fail] will be issued.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
 Single-shot Reclosing
When a trip signal is programmed to initiate the automatic reclosing system, the appropriate
automatic reclosing program will be executed. Once the circuit breaker has opened, a dead
time interval in accordance with the type of fault is started. Once the dead time interval has
elapsed, a closing signal is issued to reclose the circuit breaker.
If the fault is cleared, the reclaim time expires and the automatic reclosing is reset in
anticipation of a future fault. The fault is cleared.
If the fault is not cleared, then a final tripping signal is initiated by one or more protective
elements.
 Multi-shot Reclosing
This relay permits up to 4 shots of reclosing. The shot number of reclosing can be set. The
first reclose cycle is, in principle, the same as the single-shot auto-reclosing. If the first
reclosing attempt is unsuccessful, this does not result in a final trip, but in a reset of the
reclaim time interval and start of the next reclose cycle with the next dead time. This can be
repeated until the shot number of reclosing has been reached.
If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosing, the
reclaim time expires and the automatic reclosing system is reset. The fault is terminated.
If none of the reclosing attempts is successful, then a final circuit breaker trip will take place
after the last allowable reclosing attempt has been performed by the protection function. All
reclosing attempts were unsuccessful.
After the final circuit breaker trip, the automatic reclosing system is dynamically blocked.
An example of a timing diagram for a successful second reclosing is shown as below.
Pickup
Protection
Trip
Circuit Open
Breaker
Active
79.t_3PS1 79.t_3PS2
Dead Time
79.t_DDO_AR 79.t_DDO_AR
Reclose
Auto- 79.t_Reclaim 79.t_Reclaim
recloser Reset
79.t_Fail 79.t_Fail
CB Check
Fail
Inprog
Figure 3.15-1 Timing diagram for a successful second reclosing
An example of a timing diagram for an unsuccessful one-shot reclosing is shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Pickup
Protection
Trip
Circuit Open
Breaker
Active
79.t_3PS1
Dead Time
79.t_DDO_AR
Reclose
Auto- 79.t_Reclaim
recloser Reset
79.t_Fail
CB Check
Fail
Inprog
Figure 3.15-2 Timing diagram for an unsuccessful one-shot reclosing
The logic diagram of the auto-recloser is shown in Figure 3.15-3.
[79.En]
[79.En1]
[79.Ready]
[79.Blk]
[79.Inprog]
25A.Ok_SynChk
&
[79.En_SynChk]
25A.Ok_DdChk
[79.En_DdChk]
[79.OnLoad]
&
[79.Init]
tAR1 0
& [79.Close_3PS1]
[79.N_Rcls] = 1
tAR2 0
& [79.Close_3PS2]
[79.N_Rcls] = 2
tAR3 0
& [79.Close_3PS3]
[79.N_Rcls] = 3
tAR4 0
& [79.Close_3PS4]
[79.N_Rcls] = 4
Figure 3.15-3 Logic diagram of the auto-recloser
Where:
“tARX” (x: 1~4) is the setting [79.t_3PSx] (x: 1~4), the time setting of the auto-recloser;
[79.En] is the logic setting of the auto-recloser;
[79.N_Rcls] is the shot number of the auto-recloser;
[79.Ready] denotes that the auto-recloser is ready for operation;
[79.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the auto-recloser;
[79.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the auto-recloser;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[79.En_SynChk] is the logic setting of the synchronism check mode of the auto-recloser;
[79.En_DdChk] is the logic setting of the dead check mode of the auto-recloser;
“25A.Ok_SynChk” is the result of the synchronism check of the auto-recloser;
“25A.Ok_DdChk” is the result of the dead check of the auto-recloser;
[79.OnLoad] denotes that anyone of the phase currents is greater than 0.04In, which can be
gotten the signal “Prot.OnLoad” through the PCS-Explorer;
[79.Init] is the auto-recloser initiation signal which can be configured through the
PCS-Explorer.
3.15.2 Auto-recloser Ready Conditions

When the auto-recloser is enabled, and if all the following cases are ready in normal operation
situation, the auto-recloser will be in service automatically after the predefined time setting.
1. The CB is closed manually (local or remote) and the CB normally closed contact (BI_52b) is
“0”.
2. Any protection element is not in startup status; i.e. the fault detector does not operate: when
the CB is closed, if the fault detector is operated, it means that the CB is closed onto an
abnormal system or a fault system.
3. The blocking signal of the auto-recloser “79.Blk” is “0”; that is no blocking auto-recloser
condition is met.
4. The binary input of the operation circuit status of the CB (BI_LowPres_Cls) is “0”; i.e. the CB
is ready for reclosing.
If the auto-recloser is ready, there is a full charged battery sign on the right bottom of LCD.
The logic diagram of the auto-recloser ready conditions is shown as below.
tCBCls 100ms
[BI_52b]
&
[FD.Pkp]
tCBRdy 0
[BI_LowPres_Cls]
& 79.Ready
0 tPWBlk
[79.Blk] &
[79.En]
[79.En1]
Figure 3.15-4 Logic diagram of the auto-recloser ready conditions
Where:
[79.En] is the logic setting of the auto-recloser;
[79.En1] is the binary signal for enabling the auto-recloser;
[BI_52b] is the binary input for inputting the normally closed contact of the circuit breaker;

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
[FD.Pkp] means that the fault detector is operated;
[BI_LowPres_Cls] is the binary input for inputting the CB closing low pressure signal;
[79.Blk] is the binary signal for blocking the auto-recloser;
“tCBCls ” is the setting [79.t_CBClsd] of the minimum time delay for ensuring the CB is closed;
“tCBRdy ” is the setting [79.t_CBReady] of the time delay for ensuring the CB is ready;
“tPWBlk ” is the setting [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] of the pulse width for ensuring the AR blocking
signal.
3.15.3 Auto-recloser Startup Condition

The startup condition of the auto-recloser is that anyone of the protective elements (for example,
the overcurrent protection, zero sequence overcurrent protection etc.) which are configured for
initiating the auto-recloser through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software has
operated successfully.
The auto-reclosing startup logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3. To prevent the auto-reclosing
startup element from undesired operation, this relay takes the currents into account (the signal
[79.OnLoad]). Only when the circuit breaker has tripped completely, the auto-recloser will be put
into service.
3.15.4 Auto-recloser Check Mode

Three check modes are adopted in this relay: synchronism check mode, dead check mode and
non-check mode. Each mode can be selected through a corresponding logic setting.
 Synchronism check mode
The following conditions must be satisfied in the synchro check auto -reclosing function.
1. The protection voltage is greater than the setting [25.U_Lv];
2. The synchro-check voltage is greater than [25.U_Lv] / [25.U_Comp];
3. The voltage difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage
(ΔU = |UProt - USy n × [25.U_Comp]|) is less than the setting [25A.U_Diff];
4. The frequency of protection voltage and the frequency of synchro -check voltage are in
the range fn ± 5Hz (fn: the rated system frequency);
5. The frequency difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage
(Δf = |fProt - fSy n|) is less than the setting [25A.f_Diff];
6. The phase angle difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check
voltage (Δδ = |ΦProt – (ΦSy n + [25.phi_Comp])|) is less than the setting [25A.phi_Diff].
For the details about the settings [25.U_Comp] and [25.phi_Comp], see Section 7.4.1.
If the above conditions are satisfied at the same time for longer than [25A.t_SynChk], the
signal of the synchronism check of the auto-recloser “25A.Ok_SynChk” is issued.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
When the reclosing operation is executed, this relay checks the synchronism check closing
conditions in the period of the setting [25A.t_Wait]. If the synchro check closing conditions are
satisfied, this relay will issue the reclosing command.
The logic diagram of the synchronism check element for the auto-recloser is shown as below.
UProt > [25.U_Lv]

USyn > [25.U_Lv]/[25.U_Comp]
tARSynChk 0
ΔU < [25A.U_Diff] & 25A.Ok_SynChk
Δf < [25A.f_Diff]
Δδ < [25A.phi_Diff]
Figure 3.15-5 Logic diagram of the synchr onism check element for AR
Where:
“UProt ” is the protection voltage value;
“USy n” is the synchro-check voltage;
“ΔU” is the voltage difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
“Δf” is the frequency difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
“Δδ” is the angle difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
[25.U_Lv] is the voltage setting of the live voltage;
[25A.U_Diff] is the voltage difference setting of the synchronism check function for the
auto-recloser;
[25A.f_Diff] is the frequency difference setting of the synchronism check function for the
auto-recloser;
[25A.phi_Diff] is the phase angle difference setting of the synchronism check function for
the auto-recloser;
“tARSy nChk ” is the setting [25A.t_SynChk], the time setting of the synchronism check
function for the auto-recloser.
 Dead check mode
In dead check mode case, the relay checks the protection voltage and synchro-check voltage.
There are several kinds of dead check modes which are supported in this relay and the dead
check mode can be selected according to the demands of a practical engineering by the
setting [25A.Opt_DdChk].
The relationship between the setting [25A.Opt_DdChk] and the dead check mode is listed in
following table.
[25A.Opt_DdChk] Description of Dead Check Mode

1 The protection voltage is dead, and the synchro-check voltage is dead.
2 The protection voltage is dead, and the synchro-check voltage is live.
3 The protection voltage is live, and the synchro-check voltage is dead.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
4 The protection voltage is dead, the synchro-check voltage is live or dead.

5 The synchro-check voltage is dead, the protection voltage is live or dead.
6 One of the two voltages is live, another one is dead.
7 One of the two voltages is dead, another one is live or dead.
The logic diagram of the dead check element for the auto-recloser is shown as below.
UProt < [25.U_Dd]

USyn < [25.U_Dd]/[25.U_Comp] Dead
UProt > [25.U_Dd] Check
USyn > [25.U_Dd]/[25.U_Comp]

tARDdChk 0
[25A.Opt_DdChk] & 25A.Ok_DdChk
[VTS.Alm]
[VTS.Alm_SynVT]
Figure 3.15-6 Logic diagram of the dead check element for AR
Where:
“USy n” is the synchro-check voltage value;
[25.U_Dd] the voltage setting for denoting whether the system is dead;
[25.U_Lv] the voltage setting for denoting whether the system is live;
“tARDdChk ” is the setting [25A.t_DdChk], the time setting of the dead check function for the
auto-recloser;
[25A.Opt_DdChk] is the setting for selecting the dead check mode of the auto-recloser.
 Non-check mode
In non-check mode case, the reclosing is permitted without taking the value , phase angle and
frequency of the two voltages into account. After the reclosing delay time, this relay will issue
a reclosing signal, if all the other reclosing conditions are ready.
If the two settings [79.En_SynChk] and [79.En_DdChk] are set as “0”, the non-check mode will be
in service. If one of the two settings [79.En_SynChk] and [79.En_DdChk] is set as “1”, the relevant
reclosing check mode will be in service. If the two settings [79.En_SynChk] and [79.En_DdChk]
are set as “1” together, the two reclosing check modes will be in service; and if anyone of the
reclosing check modes is met, the corresponding check output is for the auto-reclosing.
3.15.5 Auto-recloser Blocking Logic
After the auto-recloser is put into service successfully, and if anyone of the following cases occurs
at anytime in normal operation situation, the relay will block the auto-recloser automatically at
once.
1. Open the circuit breaker by manual tripping.
2. Open the circuit breaker by remote tripping.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
3. The VT failure occurs and it is detected by the relay ([VTS.Alm_SynVT] = 1 or [VTS.Alm] = 1),
if the reclosing check mode is dead check mode.
4. The blocking signal of the auto-recloser “79.Blk” is “1”; that is at least one of the blocking
auto-recloser conditions is met. The blocking auto-recloser conditions can be configured for
blocking the auto-recloser through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software
5. The binary input of the closing operation circuit status of the CB (BI_LowPres_Cls) is “1”; i.e.
the CB is not ready for reclosing ([BI_LowPres_Cls] = 1).
6. The last auto-reclosing command has been issued successfully.
If the auto-recloser is blocked, there is an empty battery sign on the right bottom of LCD.
3.15.6 Auto-recloser Settings
All the settings of the auto-recloser are listed in the following table. For the information about the
common explanation of the settings, see Section 7.3.

The time setting of the minimum time delay for
1 79.t_CBClsd 0.01~600s 0.001s
ensuring the CB is closed
The time pulse width for ensuring the AR blocking
2 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.01~600s 0.001s
signal
The time setting of the time delay for ensuring the
3 79.t_CBReady 0.01~600s 0.001s
CB is ready
The time setting of the time delay for checking the
4 79.t_Fail 0.01~600s 0.001s
CB position
5 79.t_3PS1 The time setting of the 1 st shot auto-recloser 0~600s 0.001s
nd
6 79.t_3PS2 The time setting of the 2 shot auto-recloser 0~600s 0.001s
rd
th
9 79.t_Reclaim The reclaim time setting of the auto-recloser 0~600s 0.001s
10 79.t_DDO_AR The pulse width of the auto-recloser 0-4.00s 0.001s
11 79.N_Rcls The shot number setting of the auto-recloser 1~4 1
The logic setting of the synchronism check
12 79.En_SynChk 0~1 1
function of the auto-recloser
The logic setting of the dead check function of the
13 79.En_DdChk 0~1 1
auto-recloser
The logic setting of the CB position check function
14 79.En_FailChk 0~1 1
of the auto-recloser
15 79.En The logic setting of the auto-recloser 0~1 1
0x0000 ~
16 79.OutMap The output matrix setting of the auto-recloser 1
0x3FFF
The settings about the check function of the auto-recloser are listed in the following table. For the

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

1 25.U_Dd The voltage setting of the system dead check 2~120V 0.001V
2 25.U_Lv The voltage setting of the system live check 2~120V 0.001V
The compensation coefficient setting of the
3 25.U_Comp 0.2~5.0 0.001
synchro-check voltage
The compensation phase angle setting of the
4 25.phi_Comp 0~360° 1°
The voltage type setting of the synchronism check
5 25.Opt_Usyn 0~5 1
closing function
The circuit breaker closing time setting of the
6 25.t_ClsCB 0.02~1.00s 0.001s
closing synchronism check function
The voltage difference setting of the auto-closing
7 25A.U_Diff 2~120V 0.001V
synchronism check function
The frequency difference setting of the
8 25A.f_Diff 0~2Hz 0.001Hz
auto-closing synchronism check function
The phase angle difference setting of the
9 25A.phi_Diff 0~60° 1°
The waiting time setting of the auto-closing
10 25A.t_Wait 0.01~600s 0.001s
The setting for selecting the dead check mode of
11 25A.Opt_DdChk 1~7 1
the auto-closing synchronism check function
The time setting of the dead check function of the
12 25A.t_DdChk 0.01~25s 0.001s
auto-closer
The time setting of the synchronism check
13 25A.t_SynChk 0.01~25s 0.001s
function of the auto-closer
3.16 Manual Closing Function
3.16.1 Manual Closing Theory

This relay supports manual closing function (local or remote closing). The manual closing can be
initiated a local input signal (through a binary input or the control panel) or remote closing signal
from a supervision and control system (SAS, SCADA). Three check modes described below can
be selected for the manual closing function.
The logic diagram of the manual closing function is shown as below.
ManCls_Cmd
25M.Ok_SynChk
& ManCls.Inprog
[25M.En_SynChk]
25M.BI_EnSynChk
25M.Ok_DdChk
[25M.En_DdChk]
25M.BI_EnDdChk
Figure 3.16-1 Logic diagram of the manual closing function

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
Where:
“ManCls_Cmd” is the manual closing command;
“25M.Ok_SynChk” is the result of the synchronism check of the manual closing function;
“25M.Ok_DdChk” is the result of the dead check of the manual closing function;
“25M.BI_EnSynChk” is the binary input for enabling the synchronism check mode, and it can
be configured through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software;
“25M.BI_EnDdChk” is the binary input for enabling the dead check mode, and it can be
configured through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software;
[25M.En_SynChk] is the logic setting of the synchronism check of the manual closing;
[25M.En_DdChk] is the logic setting of the dead check of the manual closing.
3.16.2 Check Mode for Manual Closing Function
This relay provides three check modes for the manual closing function (local or remote closing):
synchronism check mode, dead check mode and non-check mode. Each mode can be selected
through the relevant logic settings.
 Synchronism check mode
The following conditions must be satisfied in the synchro check manual closing function.
1. The protection voltage is greater than the setting [25.U_Lv];
2. The synchro-check voltage is greater than [25.U_Lv] / [25.U_Comp];
3. The voltage difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage
(ΔU = |UProt - USy n × [25.U_Comp]|) is less than the setting [25M.U_Diff];
4. The frequency of protection voltage and the frequency of synchro -check voltage are in
the range fn ± 5Hz (fn: the rated system frequency);
5. The frequency difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage
(Δf = |fProt - fSy n|) is less than the setting [25M.f_Diff];
6. The rate-of-change of the frequency difference (dΔf/dt) is less than the setting [25M.df/dt]
to decrease the disturbance to the power system when the CB is closed;
7. The phase angle difference between the protection voltage and the synchro-check
voltage (Δδ = |ΦProt – (ΦSy n + [25.phi_Comp])|) is less than the setting [25M.phi_Diff].
For the details about the settings [25.U_Comp] and [25.phi_Comp], see Section 7.4.1.
If the above conditions are satisfied at the same time, the signal of the s ynchronism check of
the manual closing “25M.Ok_SynChk” is issued.
When the manual closing operation is executed, this relay checks synchronism check closing
conditions in the period of the setting [25M.t_Wait]. If the synchro check closing conditions
are satisfied, this relay will issue the closing command.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
The logic diagram of the manual closing synchronism check element is shown as below.
UProt > [25.U_Lv]

USyn > [25.U_Lv]/[25.U_Comp]
ΔU < [25M.U_Diff]
Δf < [25M.f_Diff] &
dΔf/dt < [25M.df/dt]
25M.Ok_SynChk
Δδ < [25M.phi_Diff]
[25M.En_SynChk]
Figure 3.16-2 Logic diagram of the synchr onism check element for manual closing
Where:
“ΔU” is the voltage difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
“Δf” is the frequency difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
“dΔf/dt” is the rate-of-change of the frequency difference;
“Δδ” is the angle difference of the protection voltage and the synchro-check voltage;
[25.U_Lv] is the voltage setting of the live voltage;
[25M.U_Diff] is the voltage difference setting of the synchronism check function for the
manual closing;
[25M.f_Diff] is the frequency difference setting of the synchronism check function for the
manual closing;
[25M.df/dt] is the frequency rate-of-change setting of the synchro check closing function
for the manual closing;
[25M.phi_Diff] is the phase angle difference setting of the synchronism check function for
the manual closing.
 Dead check mode
In dead check mode case, the relay checks the protection voltage and synchro-check voltage.
There are several kinds of dead check modes which are supported in this relay and the dead
check mode can be selected according to the demands of a practical engineering by the
setting [25M.Opt_DdChk].
The relationship between the setting [25M.Opt_DdChk] and the dead check mode is listed in
following table.
[25M.Opt_DdChk] Description of Dead Check Mode

1 The protection voltage is dead, and the synchro-check voltage is dead.
2 The protection voltage is dead, and the synchro-check voltage is live.
3 The protection voltage is live, and the synchro-check voltage is dead.

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory
4 The protection voltage is dead, the synchro-check voltage is live or dead.

5 The synchro-check voltage is dead, the protection voltage is live or dead.
6 One of the two voltages is live, another one is dead.
7 One of the two voltages is dead, another one is live or dead.
The logic diagram of the manual closing dead check element is shown as below.
UProt < [25.U_Dd]

USyn < [25.U_Dd]/[25.U_Comp] Dead
UProt > [25.U_Dd] Check
USyn > [25.U_Dd]/[25.U_Comp] &

[25M.Opt_DdChk] 25M.Ok_DdChk
[25M.En_DdChk]
Figure 3.16-3 Logic diagram of the dead check element for manual closing
Where:
[25.U_Dd] the voltage setting for denoting whether the system is dead;
[25.U_Lv] the voltage setting for denoting whether the system is live;
[25M.Opt_DdChk] is the setting for selecting the dead check mode of the manual
closing.
 Non-check mode
In non-check mode case, the manual closing is permitted without taking the value, phase
angle and frequency of the two voltages into account. If all the other manual closing
conditions are ready, this relay will issue a manual closing signal.
If the two settings [25M.En_SynChk] and [25M.En_DdChk] are set as “0”, and the two binary
inputs “25M.BI_EnSynChk” and “25M.BI_EnDdChk” are not energized, the non-check mode will
be in service. If the setting [25M.En_SynChk] is set as “1” or the binary input “25M.BI_EnSynChk”
is energized, the synchronism check mode will be in service; and if the setting [25M.En_DdChk] is
set as “1” or the binary input “25M.BI_EnDdChk” is energized, the dead check mode will be in
service. If the synchronism check mode and the dead check mode are in service at the same time;
and if anyone of the manual closing check modes is met, the corresponding check output is for the
manual closing.
3.16.3 Manual Closing Function Settings

All the settings of the closing synchronism check function are listed in the following table. For the


Date: 2015-12-01
3 Operation Theory

3 25.U_Comp 0.2~5.0 0.001
4 25.phi_Comp 0~360° 1°
5 25.Opt_Usyn 0~5 1
closing function
6 25.t_ClsCB 0.02~1.00s 0.001s
The voltage difference setting of the manual
7 25M.U_Diff 2~120V 0.001V
The frequency difference setting of the manual
8 25M.f_Diff 0~2Hz 0.001Hz
The frequency rate-of-change setting of the 0.001
9 25M.df/dt 0~3Hz/s
manual closing synchronism check function Hz/s
The phase angle difference setting of the manual
10 25M.phi_Diff 0~60° 1°
The waiting time setting of the manual closing
11 25M.t_Wait 0.01~600s 0.001s
12 25M.Opt_DdChk 1~7 1
the manual closing function
13 25M.En_SynChk 0~1 1
function of the manual closing function
14 25M.En_DdChk 0~1 1
manual closing function

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Supervision Functions ...............................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Device Hardware Supervision .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Board Configuration Error Supervision ............................................................................. 4-1
4.2.3 Setting Supervision .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Program Version Supervision ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.5 Tripped Position Contact Supervision............................................................................... 4-2
4.2.6 Low Pressure Binary Input Supervision ............................................................................ 4-2
4.2.7 VT Circuit Supervision...................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.8 CT Circuit Supervision ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.9 Time Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.10 Auxiliary Communication Testing Supervision................................................................. 4-5
4.2.11 Device Maintenance Supervision ................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.12 Reserved Programmable Alarm Supervision .................................................................. 4-5
4.2.13 Tripping Circuit Supervision............................................................................................ 4-5
4.2.14 A/D Sampling Supervision.............................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.15 FO Channel Supervision ................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.16 Differential Current Supervision...................................................................................... 4-6
List of Figures
Figure 4.2-1 Logic diagram of the 52b contact supervision e lement................................... 4-2
Figure 4.2-2 Logic diagram of the protection VTS element.................................................. 4-3
Figure 4.2-3 Logic diagram of the synchro-check VTS element .......................................... 4-4
Figure 4.2-4 Logic diagram of the CTS element.................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4.2-5 Principle of the TCS function with two binary inputs ...................................... 4-5

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail.
When the equipment is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the equipment
needs to be checked to ensure there are no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function,
which checks the health of the protection system during startup and normal operation procedure,
plays an important role.
The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations has the capability for implementing
this automatic supervision function of the protection system.
In case a fatal fault is detected during automatic supervision, the equipment will be blocked out. It
means that this relay is out of service. Therefore you must re-energize the relay or even replace a
module to make this relay back into service.
4.2 Supervision Functions
4.2.1 Device Hardware Supervision
The MCU, RAM, ROM chips in this relay are monitored continuously to ensure whether they are
damaged or have some errors.
If any one of them is detected damaged or having error, this relay will be blocked, the alarm signal
[Fail_Device] will be issued, and the LED indicator “HEALTHY” will be off at the same time.
4.2.2 Board Configuration Error Supervision

If the board configuration of this relay does not comply with the program software of this relay, the
alarm signals [Fail_Device] and [Fail_BoardConfig] will be issued, and the LED indicator
“HEALTHY” will be off at the same time.
4.2.3 Setting Supervision

This relay has 10 setting groups, but only one is active at any time. The settings of active setting
group are checked continuously.
If anyone of the active settings is confirmed to be modified, this relay will be blocked, the alarm
signals [Fail_Device] and [Fail_Setting] will be issued; meanwhile, if the modified setting is out of
the appointed range, the alarm signal [Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued at the same time.
The LED indicator “HEALTHY” will be off at the same time.
If anyone of the items of the setting file is changed (the program of this relay is updated), the
alarm signal [Fail_SettingItem_Chgd] will be issued. The LED indicator “HEALTHY” will be off at
the same time.
If the settings which are from the HMI module to the main CPU module are not in accordance with

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
the current settings of the main CPU module, the alarm signal [Alm_ Setting_MON] will be issued.
The LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
4.2.4 Program Version Supervision

If the relay detects that the current program version is not in accordance with the program version
which is defined by the manufacturer, the alarm signal [Alm_Version ] will be issued. The LED
indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
4.2.5 Tripped Position Contact Supervision
If the relay detects that the tripped auxiliary contact position is on (i.e., the value of [BI_52b] is “1”.),
meanwhile any phase current is greater than 0.04In, and such a condition keeps for longer than
10 seconds, the alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_52b] will be issued, and the LED indicator
“ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
The logic diagram of the tripped position contact supervision function is shown as below.
Ia > 0.04In
Ib > 0.04In Prot.OnLoad
Ic > 0.04In
Prot.OnLoad
10s 0
& [Alm_52b]
[BI_52b]
Figure 4.2-1 Logic diagram of the 52b contact supervision element
4.2.6 Low Pressure Binary Input Supervision

This relay has two binary inputs [BI_LowPres_Cls] and [BI_LowPres_Trp] which are used to
indicate the state of the circuit breaker mechanism.
If the binary input [BI_LowPres_Cls] is energized for longer than 15s, this relay will issue the
alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_LowPres_Cls]; and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at
the same time. The auto-recloser and the first remote closing output functions are blocked.
If the binary input [BI_LowPres_Trp] is energized for longer than 5s, this relay will issue the alarm
signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_LowPres_Trp] 5s later, and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on
at the same time. The first remote tripping output function is blocked.
4.2.7 VT Circuit Supervision

The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the AC voltage input
circuit of this relay.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure and automatically adjust the
configuration of protective elements whose stability would otherwise be compromised. A time
delay alarm output is also available.
 Protection VT supervision
If this relay detects any one of the following two conditions is satisfied, it means that the

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
protection VT is in abnormal status.
(1) The negative phase sequence voltage is greater than 8V.
(2) The positive phase sequence voltage is less than 30V, and any of the phase currents is
greater than 0.04In.
Then the alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [VTS.Alm] are issued 10s later, and the LED
“ALARM ” will be on at the same time. When the protection VT status returns to normal
condition, the alarm will restore automatically 1.25s later. In case the protection VT circuit is
failed, these protective elements dependent on voltage will be blocked.
If the fast VT failure is detected, the internal signal “VTS.InstAlm” will be “1” without any time
delay. In the fast VTS element, the phase current or the negative sequence current must be
taken into account.
The logic diagram of the protection VTS element is shown as below.
Prot.OnLoad
& 10s 0
U1 < 30V
U2 > 8V
& [VTS.Alm]
&
I2 < [VTS.I2_Set]
Ia < [VTS.I_Set]
Ib < [VTS.I_Set] & &
Ic < [VTS.I_Set]
& VTS.InstAlm
U1 < 15V
[Sig_MCB_VTS]
[VTS.En]
Figure 4.2-2 Logic diagram of the protection VTS element
Where:
“Prot.OnLoad” is the signal for denoting the system is on load state;
[VTS.En] is the logic setting of the protection VTS function;
[VTS.I_Set] is the phase current setting of the protection VTS function;
[VTS.I2_Set] is the negative sequence current setting of the protection VTS function;
[Sig_MCB_VTS] is the VT supervision input from VT’s miniature circuit breaker (MCB)
auxiliary contact which shows the MCB whether is opened;
“U1” is the positive sequence voltage;
“U2” is the negative sequence voltage.
 Synchro-check VT supervision
This function is used to supervise the synchro-check voltage transformer circuit. When the
setting [VTS.En_SynVT] is set as “1”, if the difference between the measured synchro-check

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
voltage (“Ux”) and the setting [Syn.U2n] is greater than 15V for longer than 10s, the alarm
signals [Alm_Device] and [VTS.Alm_SynVT] will be issued, and the LED “ALARM ” will be on
at the same time. When the status of the synchro-check VT returns to normal condition, the
alarm will restore automatically 1.25s later.
[79.En_SynChk]
[79.En_DdChk]
10s 0
|Ux – [Syn.U2n]| > 15V
& [VTS.Alm_SynVT]
[VTS.En_SynVT]
Figure 4.2-3 Logic diagram of the synchro-check VTS element
Where:
[VTS.En_SynVT] is the logic setting of the synchro-check VTS function;
[79.En_SynChk] is the logic setting of the synchronism check mode of the auto -recloser;
[79.En_DdChk] is the logic setting of the dead check mode of the auto-recloser.
4.2.8 CT Circuit Supervision
The main purpose of the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is to detect faults in the
secondary circuits of the current transformer and avoid influence on the operation of relevant
protection functions. This current transformer supervision (CTS) function will be in operation at
any time, whether the general fault detection picks up or not.
The criteria of the CTS element are:
1. The calculated zero sequence current is greater than the setting [CTS.3I0_Set];
2. The calculated zero sequence voltage is less than the setting [CTS.3U0_Set].
If a CT circuit failure is detected, the alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [CTS.Alm] will be issued,
and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
If the fast CT circuit failure is detected, the internal signal [CTS.InstAlm] will be “1” without any
time delay.
The logic diagram of the CTS element is shown as below.
I0Cal > [CTS.3I0_Set]

10s 0
U0Cal < [CTS.3U0_Set] & [CTS.Alm]
[CTS.En] CTS.InstAlm
Figure 4.2-4 Logic diagram of the CTS element
Where:
[CTS.3I0_Set] is the threshold current setting of the CTS element;
[CTS.3U0_Set] is the threshold voltage setting of the CTS element;

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
[CTS.En] is the logic setting of the CTS element.
If there has no phase current to be led to this relay, the setting [CTS.En] must be set as “0”.
4.2.9 Time Synchronization Supervision
If the time synchronization function is enabled in this relay, but this relay detects the time
synchronization is not correct, the alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_TimeSyn] will be issued
and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
4.2.10 Auxiliary Communication Testing Supervision

If this relay is in the auxiliary communication testing of binary signal or metering, the alarm signals
[Alm_Device] and [Alm_CommTest] will be issued and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at
the same time.
4.2.11 Device Maintenance Supervision

If this relay is in the maintenance situation (the binary input which is used for denoting
maintenance situation is energized), the alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_Maintenance] will
be issued and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
4.2.12 Reserved Programmable Alarm Supervision

The relay provides several reserved programmable alarm signals which can be programmed
through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software according to the engineering
demands. When the relay detects anyone of the reserved programmable alarms is trigged, the
alarm signals [Alm_Device] and [Alm_SpareX] (X: a number; 01, 02 etc.) will be issued and the
LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
4.2.13 Tripping Circuit Supervision

The tripping circuit supervision function can be realized by program the logic function of this
device through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software according to the practical
application experience of the user.
In this manual, a scheme which uses two independent binary inputs to supervise the tripping
circuit is recommended.
The following figure show the recommended scheme for tripping circuit supervision and the logic
diagram of the TCS function.
DC+ DC-
52a TC
BTJ
52b
PCS-9613 Circuit Breaker

[B07.BI_01]
& 600ms [Alm_TCS]
[B07.BI_02]
Figure 4.2-5 Principle of the TCS function with two binary inputs

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Supervision
Where:
“BTJ” is the protection tripping output contact;
“TC” is the tripping coil of the circuit breaker;
[B07.BI_01] is the binary input which is parallel connected with “BTJ”;
[B07.BI_02] is the binary input which is serial connected with the “52b” contact.
4.2.14 A/D Sampling Supervision

If the sampling value of the dual channel is inconsistent, the alarm signals [Alm_Sample] will be
issued and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time. The related protection
function of this device will be blocked.
4.2.15 FO Channel Supervision
If the CRC code of the received frame from opposite device through FO channel is not correct, the
alarm signals [FO.Alm_CRC] and [FO.Alm] will be issued and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be
on at the same time.
If the received frame from opposite device through FO channel is not valid, the alarm signals
[FO.Alm_NoValFram] and [FO.Alm] will be issued and the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at
the same time.
If the received data from opposite device through FO channel is not synchronized with local
sampled data, the alarm signals [FO1.Alm_Connect] and [FO.Alm] will be issued and the LED
indicator “ALARM ” will be on at the same time.
For the alarm signal [FO.Alm_ID], see Section 3.3.1. And the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be on at
the same time.
4.2.16 Differential Current Supervision

For the alarm signal [87L.Alm_Diff], see Section 3.3.3.5. And the LED indicator “ALARM ” will be
on at the same time.

Date: 2015-12-01
Table of Contents
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................5-1

5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 Protection Sampling ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Metering .......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Circuit Breaker Control ..............................................................................................5-1

5.4 Signaling ........................................................................................................................5-2
5.5 Event Recording ..........................................................................................................5-2
5.6 Fault and Disturbance Recording ...........................................................................5-3

5.7 Setting Group Switch Function................................................................................5-3
List of Figures
Figure 5.3-1 Demonstration diagram of the control function ............................................... 5-2

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
5.1 Overview
The relay provides some management functions, such as protection sampling, metering, remote
control, signaling, event recording and fault and disturbance recording etc. All these functions can
ensure this relay meets the requirements of a modern power grid.
5.2 Measurement
This relay produces a variety of both directly and calculated power system quantities. Two kinds of
measurements are supported in this relay: protection sampling and metering. All these
measurands also can be transmitted to the SAS or RTU through communication. See Chapter 10
for more information about the communication and protocols.
5.2.1 Protection Sampling

This relay samples the protection related values with 24-point sampling rate per cycle. These
protection sampled values are being updated per 0.5s and can be viewed in the submenu
“Measurement1” of this relay or via relay communication. See Section 8.2.3 for more details
about the protection measurands.
5.2.2 Metering
This relay samples the metering values with 48-point sampling rate per cycle. These metering
values are being undated per 0.5s and can be viewed in the submenu “Measurement2” of this
relay or via relay communication. See Section 8.2.3 for more details about the metering values.
5.3 Circuit Breaker Control
This relay can receive the control commands to trip or close the circuit breaker. Up to 5 groups of
output relays in this relay can be configured as control outputs (closing and tripping). And only the
first closing output (local or remote) can be configured with synchronism check or dead check.
The control function includes local control and remote control. The local control command can be
gotten through the binary inputs or the submenu “Control” (see Section 8.2.8.4). The remote
control command can be from the substation automatic system through the communication.
Before executing a remote control command, it is necessary to put the control switch at the
“Remote” position to make the binary signal [Ctrl.Sig_EnCtrl] be “1”.
Each control output can be control with an interlock module (which can be configured through the
PCS-Explorer) if the corresponding interlock logic setting (see Section 7.4.3) is set as “1”. If it
makes the control outputs without interlock control in such a situation, the bi nary signal
[Ctrl.Sig_Unblock] should be “1”.
The remote control commands include remote tripping command, remote closing command etc.
See Chapter 10 for more information about the communication and protocols.

Date: 2015-12-01
The demonstration diagram of the control function is shown as below.
Control PCS-9613
Switch Tripping
Button
Ctrlx.ManTrp
Closing
Local Tripping Output
Button
Control Ctrlx.ManCls
DC+
Ctrl.In_EnCtrl
Remote Closing Output

Control
Communication
Remote control
SAS
Figure 5.3-1 Demonstration diagram of the control function
5.4 Signaling
This relay has some programmable binary inputs which are used to monitor the contact positions
of the corresponding bay, or be used in protection logics or for releasing or blocking the relevant
protective element, or be used in supervision logics calculation for supervision alarm elements .
The binary inputs can be configured according to the engineering demands thro ugh the
PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software.
The binary input state change confirmation time of each binary input is configurable according to
practical application through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software, and the
default binary input state change confirmation time of the binary inputs is 10ms.
See Section 8.2.4 for more details about the binary inputs.
5.5 Event Recording
This relay supports the event recording functions which can record all the events happened in this
relay. So it is very convenient for the user to view the history records.
The following event information can be recorded.
 64 latest protection operation reports
 1024 latest supervision alarm records
 1024 latest control operation records
 1024 latest user operation records
 1024 latest reports of time tagged sequence of event (SOE)

Date: 2015-12-01
5.6 Fault and Disturbance Recording
This relay provides the fault and disturbance recording facility for recording the sampled values of
the fault and disturbance wave when a fault is occurred in the power system. The 64 latest fault
and disturbance records can be recorded in this relay, and each wave record includes up to 10000
fault sampled points (24 sampled points per cycle).
The current and voltage sampled values, the binary input signals and the protection operation
signals are contained in the fault and disturbance wave record, and the analog value sampling rate
is 24 points per cycle. The format of the wave complies with the “COMTRADE” standard.
There are several conditions which can trigger the fault and disturbance recording of this relay.
 The fault detector picks up.
 Anyone of the protective elements operates.
 Any shot of the auto-recloser operates.
 The binary input [BI_TrigDFR] is energized.
 The submenu “Trig Oscillograph” is executed.
Each waveform includes the wave recording data both before and after the fault. Each trigger
element operation will extend the wave recording time, until the appointed time delay is over after
the trigger element restores, or until the maximum number of wave recording points is reached.
5.7 Setting Group Switch Function
This relay can switch the setting group number if this relay is in normal operation situation. Two
fixed methods for switching the setting group number are described in Section 8.2.6.4. Another
method for changing the setting group number through four special binary inputs can be supported
by this relay, if this function is enabled. Four general binary inputs can be configured as signal
inputs for switching the setting group number through PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary
software. This method only can switch four groups of settings (setting group 1 to 4).
The BI_ChgSG.in_sgx (x: 1~4) is used to change the setting group. When anyone is energized
(status “0” to “1”), the corresponding setting group is put into service. If more than one binary input
is energized (status “0” to “1”), only one setting group is put into service according to the following
priority sequence: group 1, group 2, group 3 and group 4. For example, the setting g roup 1 is in
service now, if the binary inputs [BI_ChgSG.in_sg2] and [BI_ChgSG.in_sg3] are energized at the
same time, the setting group 2 will be put into service. Additionally, if the energized binary input
[BI_ChgSG.in_sgx] (x: 1~4) is not energized any more, that means all the four binary inputs are
not energized, the running setting group will not change.

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Basic Enclosure ...........................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Human Machine Interface Module (NR4856) ........................................................6-4

6.4 Power Supply Module (NR4304/NR4305) ..............................................................6-4
6.5 Main CPU Module (NR4106) ......................................................................................6-6
6.6 Analog Input Module (NR4412) ................................................................................6-8
6.6.1 Connection Examples .................................................................................................... 6-10
6.6.2 Current Transformer Requirements ................................................................................ 6-12
6.7 Binary Output Module (NR4521) ........................................................................... 6-13

6.8 Binary Input Module (NR4501/NR4502/NR4503/NR4504)............................... 6-14
6.9 FO Channel Module (NR4202) ............................................................................... 6-17
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware structure of this relay........................................................................ 6-1
Figure 6.1-2 Front panel of this relay without control buttons............................................. 6-2
Figure 6.1-3 Front panel of this relay with control buttons .................................................. 6-2
Figure 6.1-4 Rear panel of this relay ...................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.2-1 Rack, back plane and slot allocation of this relay ........................................... 6-4
Figure 6.4-1 View of the power supply module ..................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6.5-1 View of the main CPU module ........................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6.5-2 Jumpers of time synchronization interface ...................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.6-1 View of the analog input module....................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.6-2 Current connection examples ..........................................................................6-11
Figure 6.6-3 Voltage connection examples ..........................................................................6-11
Figure 6.7-1 View of the binary output module ................................................................... 6-13
Figure 6.8-1 View of the binary input module ..................................................................... 6-15

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
Figure 6.9-1 View of the FO channel module ...................................................................... 6-18

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
The modular design of this relay allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified
service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the configurable modules, and
back-plugging structure design makes it easy to repair or replace any module.
There are several types of hardware modules in this relay; each module takes a different part in
this relay. The relevant modules can be selected according to the practical engineering demands.
These modules which are supported in this relay and their module codes are listed as below.
No. Module Description Module Code Configuration

1 Human machine interface module NR4856 Mandatory
2 Power supply module NR4304/NR4305 Mandatory
3 Main CPU module NR4106 Mandatory
4 FO channel module NR4202 Mandatory
5 Analog input module NR4412 Mandatory
6 Binary output module NR4521 Optional
7 Binary input module NR4501/NR4502/NR4503/ NR4504 Optional
The hardware structure of this relay is shown as below.
Conventional A/D Binary

CT and VT
e.g. CB
A/D inputs
Main
Binary
DSP e.g. CB
outputs
ARM
Time
HMI Synchronization
e.g. IRIG-B
Power
Supply
PS LCD LED Print
For all modules

Keypad Communication To SCADA
Figure 6.1-1 Hardware structure of this relay
These modules can be freely equipped in the basic enclosure of this relay (see Section 6.2), and
the relationship between the module and the slot number is listed as below.
Module Description Slot Number

Power supply module Must be in the No.9 slot.
Main CPU module Must be in the No.1 slot.
FO Channel module Must be in the No.3 slot
Analog input module Must be in the No.4 and No.5 slots.
Binary output module An y slot if the slot is not occupied, default is the No.6 slot.
Binary input module An y slot if the slot is not occupied, default is the No.7 slot.
The following figures show the front panel and the rear panel of this device.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
PCS-9613
1
HEALTHY
11 DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
P
GR
ESC ENT
Figure 6.1-2 Front panel of this relay without control buttons
PCS-9613
1
HEALTHY
11 DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
2 12
ALARM
3 13
4 14
5 15
6 16
7 17
8 18
R
9 19
L
10 20
P
GR
ENT
ESC
Figure 6.1-3 Front panel of this relay with control buttons

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NR4106 NR4202 NR4412 NR4521 NR4503 NR4304
01
TX 01 02
02
03
03 04 04
RX 05
05 06
06
07
08
07 08
09 10
09
10
11 12 11
12
13 14
13
15 16
14
15
17 18 16
17
19 20
18
19
21 22
20 PWR+
23 24
21 PWR-
22 GND
25 26
Figure 6.1-4 Rear panel of this relay
NOTICE!
The hardware module configuration in above figure is only a demonstration for

explaining how the hardware module is configured. The hardware module configuration
can be different according to the different engineering demands, and the hardware
module configuration of a practical engineering should be taken as final and binding.
NOTICE!
The No.8 slot is reserved for some special demands, if the present hardware
configuration can not meet the special demands.
CAUTION!
Do NOT look into the end of an optical fiber connected to an optical port.
Do NOT look into an optical port/connector.
A direct sight to laser light may cause temporary or permanent blindness.
6.2 Basic Enclosure
The basic enclosure of this relay is an electronic equipment rack (see Figure 6.2-1) with an
adequate number of slots for all these modules. The basic rack is equipped with a back plane
(mother board), and the back plane provides some back plane lines for distributing signals within
the enclosure.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
The rack, back plane and the slot allocation of this relay is shown as below. The hardware module
configuration is in accordance with the Figure 6.1-4.
Slot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NR4501/02/03/04
NR4304/NR4305
NR4106
NR4202
NR4412
NR4521
Figure 6.2-1 Rack, back plane and slot allocation of this relay
6.3 Human Machine Interface Module (NR4856)
The human machine interface (HMI) module is installed on the front panel of this device. It is used
to observe the running status and event information on the LCD, and configure the protection
settings and device operation mode. It can help the user to know the status of this relay and
detailed event information easily, and provide convenient and friendly access interface for the user.
Please see Chapter 8 for further details about how to access the human machine interface.
6.4 Power Supply Module (NR4304/NR4305)
The power supply module is a power supply converter with electrical insulation between input and
output, and a maximum output power of 30W. The power supply module has an input voltage
range as described in Section 2.1.1.1. The power supply module can provide two groups of +5Vdc
power supply outputs for other modules in this relay. The tolerances of the output voltages are
continuously monitored.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device
is in cold reserve.
The power supply module also provides binary outputs which are used to send out some
necessary binary output signals according to the relevant commands from the CPU module, and
these binary outputs only can be used as tripping and closing (protection, auto-recloser or remote
control) outputs by setting the relevant settings.
There are two types of main power supply modules: NR4304A and NR4305A. The module
NR4304A can support 110V~250V power supply input; and the module NR4305A can support
24V~48V power supply input. The view of the power supply module is shown in Figure 6.4-1.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NR4304 NR4305
01 01
02 02
03 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 07
08 08
09 09
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 PWR+ 20 PWR+
21 PWR- 21 PWR-
22 GND 22 GND
NR4304A NR4305A
Figure 6.4-1 View of the power supply module
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front side of this module. The terminal definition of the
connector is described as below.
Pin connections on the 22-pin connector of the power supply modules NR4304A and NR4305A:
Pin No. Sign Description

01 SIG_COM Signal common output terminal
02 BO_Fail_Device Failure signal output
03 BO_Alm_Device Alarming signal output
04 The No.1 programmable tripping and closing binary output.
BO_01
05 It is also a self-latched output contact.
06 The No.2 programmable tripping and closing binary output.
BO_02
07 It is also a self-latched output contact.
08
BO_03 The No.3 programmable tripping and closing binary output.
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 PSW+ DC power supply positive input
21 PSW- DC power supply negative input
22 GND Grounded terminal

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
6.5 Main CPU Module (NR4106)
The main CPU module is the central part of this equipment, and contains a powerful microchip
processor and some necessary electronic elements. This powerful processor performs all of the
functions for the relay: the protection functions, the communication management functions. There
are several A/D conversion circuits on this module, which are used to convert the AC analog
signals to corresponding DC signals for fulfilling the demand of the electrical level standard. A
high-accuracy clock chip is contained in this module, it provide accurate current time for this relay.
The functional details of the main CPU module are listed as below:
 Protection calculations
The main CPU module can calculate protective elements (such as overcurrent element, zero
sequence overcurrent etc.) on the basis of the analog sampled values (voltages and currents)
and binary inputs, and then decides whether the device needs to trip or close.
 Communication management
The main CPU module can effectively manage all communication procedures, and reliably
send out some useful information through its various communication interfaces. T hese
interfaces are used to communicate with a SAS or a RTU. It also can communicate with the
human machine interface module. If an event occurs (such as SOE, protective tripping event
etc.), this module will send out the relevant event information through these interfaces, and
make it be easily observed by the user.
 Auxiliary calculations
Based on the voltage and current inputs, the main CPU module also can calculate out the
metering values, such as active power, reactive power and power factor etc. All these values
can be sent to a SAS or a RTU through the communication interfaces.
 Time Synchronization
This module has a local clock chip and an interface to receive time synchronized signals from
external clock source. These signals include PPS (pulse per second) signal and IRIG -B
signal. Basing on the timing message (from SAS or RTU) and the PPS signal, or basing on
the IRIG-B signal, this module can synchronize local clock with the standard clock.
There are three types of main CPU modules, and the view of the main CPU module is shown in
Figure 6.5-1.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NR4106 NR4106 NR4106
TX
RX
TX
RX
NR4106AA NR4106AB NR4106AC
Figure 6.5-1 View of the main CPU module
A 16-pin or 7-pin connector is fixed on the front side of the module. The terminal definition of the
Pin connections on the connector of the main CPU module NR4106AA and NR4106AC:

01 Not used
02 A
The No.1 EIA RS-485 standardized interface for connecting with a SAS or a
03 B
RTU.
04 SGND
05 Not used.
06 A
The No.2 EIA RS-485 standardized interface for connecting with a SAS or a
07 B
RTU.
08 SGND
09 Not used.
10 SYN+
The EIA RS-485 standardized interface for time synchronization, PPS and
11 SYN-
IRIG-B signals are permitted.
12 SGND
13 Not used.
14 RTS ®
The interface for connecting with a printer, the EPSON LQ-300K printer is
15 TXD
recommended.
16 SGND
Pin connections on the connector of the main CPU module NR4106AB:

01 SYN+
The EIA RS-485 standardized interface for time synchronization, PPS and
02 SYN-
IRIG-B signals are permitted.
03 SGND
04 Not used.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
05 RTS
The interface for connecting with a printer, the EPSON ® LQ-300K printer is
06 TXD
recommended.
07 SGND
Two jumpers for the IRIG-B time synchronization interface is shown as below.
Figure 6.5-2 Jumpers of time synchronization interface
Jumper TTL RS-485

J10 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (TTL+) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (RS-485+)
J11 Pin-1 and Pin-2 are connected. (TTL5-) Pin-2 and Pin-3 are connected. (RS-485-)
6.6 Analog Input Module (NR4412)
The analog input module can transform high AC input values to relevant low AC output value,
which are suited to the analog inputs of the main CPU module. The transformers are used both to
step-down the currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to
provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. A low pass filter circuit is
connected to each transformer (CT or VT) secondary circuit for reducing the noise of each analog
AC input signal.
There are two types of analog input modules: NR4412 with 26 pins and NR4412 with 24 pins. The
view of the analog input module is shown in Figure 6.6-1.
NR4412 NR4412
01 02 01 02
03 04 03 04
05 06 05 06
07 08 07 08
09 10 09 10
11 12 11 12
13 14 13 14
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 19 20
21 22 21 22
23 24 23 24
25 26
26-pin 24-pin
Figure 6.6-1 View of the analog input module

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NOTICE!
The rated value of the current transformer is optional: 1A or 5A. The rated value of the
CT must be definitely declared in the technical scheme and the contract. Because the
rated value of the current transformer is optional, it is necessary to check whether the
rated value of the current transformer inputs is according to the demand of the
engineering scheme before the device is put into operation.
DANGER!
NEVER allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this relay to
be opened while the primary system is energized. The opened CT secondary circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage. If this safety precaution is disregarded, personal
death, severe personal injury or considerable equipment damage will occur.
A 26-pin or 24-pin connector is fixed on the front side of this module. The terminal definition of the
Pin connections on the connector of the analog input module NR4412 with 26 pins:

01 Ua
02 Ub The three voltage inputs with inner star connection (Y) for protection and
03 Uc metering.
04 Un
05 Ux
The synchro-check voltage input.
06 Uxn
07 Not used
08 Not used
09 Not used
10 Not used
11 Ia
The input of the current of the A phase for protection.
12 Ian
13 Ib
The input of the current of the B phase for protection.
14 Ibn
15 Ic
The input of the current of the C phase for protection.
16 Icn
17 I0
The input of the zero sequence current.
18 I0n
19 I0s
The input of the sensitive zero sequence current.
20 I0sn
21 Iam
The input of the current of the A phase for metering.
22 Iamn
23 Ibm
The input of the current of the B phase for metering.
24 Ibmn

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
25 Icm
The input of the current of the C phase for metering.
26 Icmn
Pin connections on the connector of the analog input module NR4412 with 24 pins:

01 Ua
02 Ub The three voltage inputs with inner star connection (Y) for protection and
03 Uc metering.
04 Un
05 Ux
The synchro-check voltage input.
06 Uxn
07 Not used
08 Not used
09 Not used
10 Not used
11 Ia
The input of the current of the A phase for protection.
12 Ian
13 Ib
The input of the current of the B phase for protection.
14 Ibn
15 Ic
The input of the current of the C phase for protection.
16 Icn
17 I0
The input of the zero sequence current.
18 I0n
19 I0s
The input of the sensitive zero sequence current.
20 I0sn
21 Not used
22 Not used
23 Not used
24 Not used
6.6.1 Connection Examples

Some connection examples of the current transformers and voltage transformer s which are
supported by this relay are shown in this section. If one of the analog inputs has no input in a
practical engineering, the relevant input terminals should be disconnected.
1. Current connections examples

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
A B C A B C
11 Ia 11 Ia
12 Ian 12 Ian
13 Ib 13 Ib
14 Ibn 14 Ibn
15 Ic 15 Ic
16 Icn 16 Icn
17 I0
(1) 18 I0n 17 I0
18 I0n
A B C
(2)
11 Ia
12 Ian
13 Ib
14 Ibn
15 Ic
16 Icn
17 I0 19 I0s
18 I0n 20 I0sn
(3) (4)
Figure 6.6-2 Current connection examples
Where:
(1) Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection for ground
current (zero sequence current or residual current).
(2) Current connections to three current transformers with a separate ground current
transformer (summation current transformer or core balance current transformer) .
(3) Current connections to two current transformers with a separate ground current
transformer (summation current transformer or core balance current tran sformer), only
for ungrounded or compensated networks.
(4) Current connection to a core balance neutral current transformer for sensitive ground
fault detection, only for ungrounded or compensated networks.
2. Voltage connections examples
A B C A B C
05 Ux
52 52 52 05 Ux 52 52 52
06 Uxn
06 Uxn
01 Ua 01 Ua
02 Ub 02 Ub
03 Uc 03 Uc
04 Un 04 Un
(1) (2)
Figure 6.6-3 Voltage connection examples

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
Where:
(1) Voltage connections to three star-connected voltage transformers and additionally to any
phase voltage (for synchronism check).
(2) Voltage connections to three star-connected voltage transformers and additionally to any
phase-to-phase voltage (for synchronism check).
6.6.2 Current Transformer Requirements
 CT Requirements
-- Rated primary current “Ipn”:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus
-- Rated continuous thermal current “Icth”:
According to the maximum load current
-- Rated short-time thermal current “Ith” and rated dynamic current “Idy n”:
According to the maximum fault current
-- Rated secondary current “Isn”
-- Accuracy limit factor “Kalf ”:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor: Kalf = Ipal / I pn
Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
 Performance Verification
Esl > Esl’
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts):

Esl
Esl = kalf × Isn × (R ct + Rbn)
Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts):
Esl’
Esl’ = k × Ipcf × Is n × (R ct + R b) / Ipn
Kalf Accuracy limit factor: Kalf = Ipal / I pn
k Stability factor: k is 1.0 ~ 2.0, the recommended value is 2.0.
Ipal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Protective checking factor current (amps): same as the maximum
Ipcf
prospective fault current
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
Rbn Rated resistance burden (ohms): Rbn = S bn / Isn2

Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Real resistance burden (ohms):
Rb
R b = R r + 2R L + R c
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05~0.10 (ohms)
RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to the CT (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
 Example
Kalf = 30.00, Isn = 5A, Rct = 1.00Ω, Sbn = 60VA
Esl = kalf × Isn × (Rct + Rbn) = kalf × Isn × (Rct + Sbn / Isn2)
So, Esl = 30 × 5 × (1 + 60 / 52) = 510V
Ipcf = 40000A, RL = 0.50Ω, Rr = 0.10Ω, Rc = 0.10Ω, Ipn = 2000A
Esl’ = k × Ipcf × Isn × (Rct + Rb) / Ipn = k × Ipcf × Isn × (Rct + (Rr + 2RL + Rc )) / Ipn
So, Esl’ = 2 × 40000 × 5 × (1 + (0.1 + 2 × 0.5 + 0.1)) / 2000 = 440V
It can meet the requirement: Esl > Esl’.
6.7 Binary Output Module (NR4521)
The binary output module consists of some necessary contact outputs, and the binary outputs are
used as tripping and closing (protection, auto-recloser or remote control) outputs or signal outputs.
It can receive tripping commands or closing commands from the main CPU module, and then act
according to these commands. It also can output some alarm signals from the main CPU module.
There is only one type of binary output module: NR4521C. The view of the binary output module is
shown in Figure 6.7-1.
NR4521C
NR4521C
Figure 6.7-1 View of the binary output module

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
Pin connections on the 22-pin connector of the binary output module NR4521C:

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
BO_07 The No.1 programmable signal binary output.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
6.8 Binary Input Module (NR4501/NR4502/NR4503/NR4504)
The binary input module contains some binary inputs which are used to monitor the contact
positions of the corresponding bay, and all the binary inputs are configurable through
PCS-Explorer configuration tool. Some of them are used as general purpose binary inputs, and
others are used as special purpose binary inputs. These binary inputs are all optical isolated
binary inputs.
The regular optical isolated binary inputs are used to monitor the position of the regular binary
signals; the special optical isolated binary inputs are used to monitor the position of the special
binary signals, which must be taken into account in the protection and interlock logic calculations
of the main CPU module.
There are four types of binary input modules: NR4501, NR4502, NR4503 and NR4504. The view
of the binary input module is shown in Figure 6.8-1.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NR4501 NR4502 NR4503 NR4504
NR4501 NR4502 NR4503 NR4504
Figure 6.8-1 View of the binary input module
Pin connections on the 22-pin connector of the binary input module NR4501:

01 BI_01 The No.1 programmable binary input.
22 BI_Opto- The common negative connection of the BI_01 to BI_21.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware

23 BI_01+
The No.1 programmable binary input.
24 BI_01-
25 BI_02+
The No.2 programmable binary input.
26 BI_02-
44 BI_Opto- The common negative connection of the BI_03 to BI_19.

01 BI_01+
The No.1 programmable binary input
02 BI_01-
03 BI_02+
04 BI_02-
05 BI_03+
06 BI_03-
07 BI_04+
08 BI_04-
09 BI_05+
10 BI_05-
11 BI_06+
12 BI_06-
13 BI_07+
14 BI_07-

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
15 BI_08+
16 BI_08-
17 BI_09+
18 BI_09-
19 BI_10+
20 BI_10-
21 BI_11+
22 BI_11-

03 BI_Opto1- The common negative connection of the BI_01 and BI_02.
22 Not used
6.9 FO Channel Module (NR4202)
The FO channel module is used to interchange data between two differential protection devices.
The view of the FO channel module is shown in Figure 6.9-1.

Date: 2015-12-01
6 Hardware
NR4202
TX
RX
NR4202F
Figure 6.9-1 View of the FO channel module

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................7-1

7.2 System Settings ...........................................................................................................7-1
7.3 Protection Settings......................................................................................................7-2

7.3.1 Current Differential Protection Settings ............................................................................ 7-3
7.3.2 Overcurrent Protection Settings ....................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.3 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings .............................................................. 7-6
7.3.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Settings ......................................................................... 7-9
7.3.5 Thermal Overload Protection Settings ............................................................................ 7-10
7.3.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings.......................................................7-11
7.3.7 Broken Conductor Protection Settings............................................................................ 7-12
7.3.8 Breaker Failure Protection Settings ................................................................................ 7-12
7.3.9 SOTF Protection Settings .............................................................................................. 7-13
7.3.10 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection Settings ...................................................... 7-14
7.3.11 Mechanical Protection Settings .................................................................................... 7-15
7.3.12 Auto-recloser Settings.................................................................................................. 7-16
7.3.13 Supervision Element Settings ...................................................................................... 7-17
7.3.14 Binary Output Matrix Settings....................................................................................... 7-17
7.4 Monitor and Control Settings ................................................................................ 7-18

7.4.1 Closing Synchronism Check Settings............................................................................. 7-18
7.4.2 Manual Control Settings................................................................................................. 7-20
7.4.3 Interlock Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-21
7.5 Logic Link Settings .................................................................................................. 7-21

7.5.1 Function Link Settings.................................................................................................... 7-22
7.5.2 Spare Link Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-22
7.6 Device Related Settings .......................................................................................... 7-22

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
7.6.1 Device Settings.............................................................................................................. 7-22
7.6.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................................ 7-23
7.7 Copy Settings ............................................................................................................ 7-29

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
7.1 Overview
The settings are used to determine the characteristic of each protective element and operation
mode of the relay. It is necessary to configure the settings of this relay according to engineering
demands before putting this relay into service. If the settings are not configured correctly, this
relay maybe works abnormally (such as communication interruption, printing out unexpected
codes etc.); it also can lead to much more serious accident (such as unwanted operation, missing
operation) sometimes.
The settings of this relay include system settings, protection settings, communication settings and
miscellaneous settings. The user can configure these settings or parameters manually (see
Section 8.2.6.2). Remote modification is also supported (IEC61850, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3.0
interface, see Chapter 10 for the details about these protocols).
NOTICE!
If a main CPU module is replaced, it is necessary to configure all the settings again
according to the configuration of the main CPU module which is replaced.
7.2 System Settings
The system settings (in the submenu “System Settings”) are mainly used to set the rated value
of VT and CT.
The following table lists all the system parameters.

1 Acti ve_Grp The active setting group number 1 ~ 10 1
2 Opt_SysFreq Select the rated system frequency: “0”, 50Hz; “1”, 60Hz 0~1 1
3 PrimaryEquip_Name The name of the protected primary equipment 1~7 characters
4 Prot.I1n Rated primary value of protection phase CT 0~20000A 1A
5 Prot.I2n Rated secondary value of protection phase CT 1/5A 4A
6 Measmt.I1n Rated primary value of metering phase CT 0~20000A 1A
7 Measmt.I2n Rated secondary value of metering phase CT 1/5A 4A
8 Neu1.I1n Rated primary value of the zero sequence CT 0~20000A 1A
9 Neu1.I2n Rated secondary value of the zero sequence CT 1/5A 4A
10 SEF.I1n Rated primary value of sensitive zero sequence CT 0~20000A 1A
11 SEF.I2n Rated secondary value of sensitive zero sequence CT 1/5A 4A
12 Prot.U1n Rated primary value of protection VT 0.1~500.0kV 0.001kV
13 Prot.U2n Rated secondary value of protection VT 100~200V 0.001V
14 Syn.U1n Rated primary value of synchro-check VT 0.1~500.0kV 0.001kV
15 Syn.U2n Rated secondary value of synchro-check VT 10~200V 0.001V
Zero sequence current is self calculated
16 Opt_3I0 0~1 1
0:from neutral CT 1:self calculated
17 Opt_PwrDir Power Measurement Mode 0~3 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
Setting explanations
1. The system settings are related to the protection activities, thus it is necessary to configure
theses settings according to actual conditions.
2. The setting [Opt_3I0] is used to select the zero sequence current source. Setting the value of
[Opt_3I0] as “1” means that the zero sequence current is self-calculated, and setting the
value as “0” means that the zero sequence current is derived from specific zero sequence CT.
The default value is “0” when the equipment is delivered.
3. The setting [Opt_PwrDir] is used to select the power measurement mode.
Active Power Lagging reactive power

[Opt_PwrDir]
To line To busbar To line To busbar
0 +W -W +Var -Var
1 -W +W +Var -Var
2 +W -W -Var +Var
3 -W +W -Var +Var
7.3 Protection Settings
The protection settings (in the submenu “Prot Settings”) are used to decide the characteristics of
the protective elements. There are up to 10 groups of protection settings in this relay.
NOTICE!
Following items should be considered before modifying the protection settings.
1. Before configuring the settings, the setting group must be configured firstly.
2. When a certain setting is of no use, in case of over-elements (such as overcurrent, residual

overcurrent), set the value as upper limit; in case of under-elements (such as under frequency,
under voltage), set the value as lower limit; set the corresponding time as 100s and disable
corresponding protection element and de-energize the corresponding binary input.
3. In general, for switch onto fault protection and accelerated protection, it is necessary to set a
time delay from decades to 100ms. Thanks to there is no 100ms time delay in the numerical
protection equipment as there in the traditional protection equipment in the past, thus it can
not avoid surge current when CB is closing if the time is set as 0.00s. For residual overcurrent
when switch onto fault and residual accelerate protection, there is zero sequence surge
current when CB is closing.
4. To a certain protection element, only when the logic setting and the state of enabling input
signal are “1”, and the state of the blocking input signal is “0” at the same time, then the
corresponding protection element is enabled, otherwise it is disabled.
5. The setting [XXXX.OutMap] is used to select the binary outputs of the module NR4304 and
the module NR4521 to send the related protection tripping or closing signal to the circuit
breaker. Each bit can control one output, and if it is set as “1”, the related protection tripping

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
or closing signal can be sent to the circuit breaker through the selected binary output.
Bit No. Corresponding Binary Output

0 The No.1 programmable binary output of the module NR4304/NR4305 (B09.BO_01)
8 The No.1 programmable binary output of the module NR4521C (B06.BO_01)
9 The No.2 programmable binary output of the m odule NR4521C (B06.BO_02)
Some of the protective elements have a setting (just like [XXXX.OutMap], “XXXX” is the
abbreviation of a protective element, such as 50/51P1, 50/51G1, 59P1 etc.) to configure the
outputs, and they have the same meanings described here. Please refer the content here for
the output matrix setting of each protective element.
7.3.1 Current Differential Protection Settings

The current differential protection settings (in the submenu “Diff Settings”) are used to determine
the characteristic of the current differential protection.
All the settings of the current differential protection are listed in the following table.

1 FO.En The logic setting of the FO function module 0~1 1
2 FO.LocID The identification code of the local device 0~65535 1
3 FO.RmtID The identification code of the remote device 0~65535 1
4 87L.I_DPFC_FD The current setting of the DPFC fault detector 0.05In~30In 0.001A
5 87L.I_OC_FD The current setting of the overcurrent fault detector 0.05In~30In 0.001A
The current setting of the zero sequence overcurrent
6 87L.3I0_ROC_FD 0.05In~30In 0.001A
fault detector
7 87L.I_Biased The current setting of the current differential protection 0.08In~30In 0.001A
8 87L.En The logic setting of the current differential protection 0~1 1
The logic setting of the local independent differential
9 87L.En_LocDiff 0~1 1
protection
10 87L.En_IntTrp The logic setting of the inter-tripping function 0~1 1
The output matrix setting of the current differential 0x0000 ~
11 87L.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
7.3.2 Overcurrent Protection Settings
The overcurrent protection settings (in the submenu “OC Settings”) are used to determine the
characteristic of the overcurrent protection.
All the settings of the overcurrent protection are listed in the following table.

The voltage s etting of the negative sequence
1 50/51P.U2_VCE 2~70V 0.001V
voltage blocking element (phase voltage)
The voltage setting of the low voltage blocking
2 50/51P.Upp_VCE 2~120V 0.001V
element (phase-to-phase voltage)
3 50/51P.RCA -180°~179° 1°
The logic setting of the function which can block
4 50/51P.En_VTS_Blk the OC protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
5 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.05~1.00 0.001
element for OC protection
6 50/51P.I_Rls_HmBlk 0.05In~30In 0.001A
blocking element of the OC protection
The setting is used to select the harmonic
7 50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk 1~3 1
blocking mode of the OC protection
8 50/51P1.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
9 50/51P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
10 50/51P1.En_VCE 0~1 1
3.4.4
12 50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
13 50/51P1.En 0~1 1
protection
14 50/51P1.OutMap 1
15 50/51P2.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
16 50/51P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
17 50/51P2.En_VCE 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

3.4.4
19 50/51P2.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
20 50/51P2.En 0~1 1
protection
21 50/51P2.OutMap 1
22 50/51P3.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
23 50/51P3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
24 50/51P3.En_VCE 0~1 1
3.4.4
26 50/51P3.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
27 50/51P3.En 0~1 1
protection
28 50/51P3.OutMap 1
29 50/51P3.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
30 50/51P3.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
31 50/51P3.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
32 50/51P3.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
33 50/51P3.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
34 50/51P3.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
35 50/51P4.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
36 50/51P4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
37 50/51P4.En_VCE 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

3.4.4
39 50/51P4.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
40 50/51P4.En 0~1 1
protection
41 50/51P4.OutMap 1
42 50/51P4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
43 50/51P4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
44 50/51P4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
45 50/51P4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
46 50/51P4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
47 50/51P4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
48 50/51P5.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
49 50/51P5.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
50 50/51P5.En 0~1 1
protection
51 50/51P6.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
52 50/51P6.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
53 50/51P6.En 0~1 1
protection
1. The setting [50/51Px.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage x (x:
1~4) overcurrent protection respectively. “0” is the non-directional mode; “1” is the forward
directional mode; and “2” is the reverse directional mode.
7.3.3 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings
The zero sequence overcurrent protection settings (in the submenu “EF Settings”) are used to
determine the characteristic of the zero sequence overcurrent protection.
All the settings of the zero sequence overcurrent protection are listed in the following table.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

1 50/51G.RCA -180°~179° 1°
zero sequence overcurrent protection
2 50/51G.En_VTS_Blk ROC protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
3 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.05~1.00 0.001
element for the ROC protection
4 50/51G.3I0_Rls_HmBlk 0.05In~30In 0.001A
blocking element of the ROC protection
5 50/51G1.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
6 50/51G1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
7 50/51G1.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
8 50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
9 50/51G1.En 0~1 1
10 50/51G1.OutMap 1
11 50/51G2.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
12 50/51G2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
13 50/51G2.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
14 50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
15 50/51G2.En 0~1 1
16 50/51G2.OutMap 1
17 50/51G3.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
18 50/51G3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
19 50/51G3.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
20 50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
21 50/51G3.En 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

22 50/51G3.OutMap 1
23 50/51G3.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
24 50/51G3.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
25 50/51G3.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
26 50/51G3.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
27 50/51G3.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
28 50/51G3.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
29 50/51G4.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
30 50/51G4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
31 50/51G4.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
32 50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk 0~1 1
33 50/51G4.En 0~1 1
34 50/51G4.OutMap 1
35 50/51G4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
36 50/51G4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
37 50/51G4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
38 50/51G4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
39 50/51G4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
40 50/51G4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
41 50/51G5.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
42 50/51G5.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
43 50/51G5.En 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

44 50/51G6.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
45 50/51G6.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
46 50/51G6.En 0~1 1
1. The setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage x (x:
1~4) zero sequence overcurrent protection respectively. “0” is the non-directional mode; “1” is
the forward directional mode; and “2” is the reverse directional mode.
7.3.4 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Settings

The sensitive earth fault protection settings (in the submenu “SEF Settings”) are used to
determine the characteristic of the sensitive earth fault protection.
All the settings of the sensitive earth fault protection are listed in the following table.

1 50/51SEF.RCA -180°~179° 1°
2 50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk SEF protection related voltage measurement 0~1 1
3 50/51SEF1.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
4 50/51SEF1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
5 50/51SEF1.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
6 50/51SEF1.En 0~1 1
fault protection
8 50/51SEF2.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
9 50/51SEF2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
10 50/51SEF2.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
11 50/51SEF2.En 0~1 1
fault protection

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

13 50/51SEF3.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
14 50/51SEF3.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
15 50/51SEF3.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
16 50/51SEF3.En 0~1 1
fault protection
18 50/51SEF4.3I0_Set 0.005~1.0A 0.001A
fault protection
19 50/51SEF4.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
fault protection
20 50/51SEF4.Opt_Dir 0~2 1
21 50/51SEF4.En 0~1 1
fault protection
23 50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for SEF4 protection
The time multiplier setting of the IDMT sensitive
24 50/51SEF4.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
earth fault protection
The minimum operation time setting of the IDMT
25 50/51SEF4.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
Constant “k” for the IDMT sensitive earth fault
26 50/51SEF4.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
Constant “C” for the IDMT sensitive earth fault
27 50/51SEF4.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the ID MT sensitive earth fault
28 50/51SEF4.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
1. The setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Dir] (x: 1~4) is used to select the directional mode for the stage
x (x: 1~4) sensitive earth fault protection respectively. “0” is the non-directional mode; “1” is
the forward directional mode; and “2” is the reverse directional mode.
7.3.5 Thermal Overload Protection Settings
The thermal overload protection settings (in submenu “ThOvLd Settings”) are used to determine
the characteristic of the thermal overload protection.
All the settings of the thermal overload protection are listed in the following table.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

The reference current s etting of the thermal
1 49.Ib_Set 0.05In~3.0In 0.001A
overload protection
The time constant s etting of the IDMT o verload
2 49.Tau 10~6000s 0.001s
protection
The factor setting of the thermal overload
3 49.K_Trp protection which is associated to the thermal state 1.0~3.0 0.001
formula
The factor setting of the thermal overload alarm
4 49.K_Alm element which is associated to the thermal state 0.5~3.0 0.001
formula
5 49.En_Trp 0~1 1
protection for tripping
6 49.En_Alm 0~1 1
protection for alarming
The output matrix setting of the thermal overload 0x0000 ~
7 49.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
7.3.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Settings

The negative sequence overcurrent protection settings (in the submenu “NegOC Settings”) are
used to determine the characteristic of the negative sequence overcurrent protection.
All the settings of the negative sequence overcurrent protection are listed in the following table.

1 50/51Q1.I2_Set 0.05In~4In 0.001A
2 50/51Q1.t_Op 0.03~100s 0.001s
3 50/51Q1.En 0~1 1
4 50/51Q1.OutMap 1
5 50/51Q2.I2_Set 0.05In~4In 0.001A
6 50/51Q2.t_Op 0.03~100s 0.001s
7 50/51Q2.En 0~1 1
8 50/51Q2.OutMap 1
9 50/51Q2.Opt_Curve 0~13 1
characteristic curve for the NOC2 protection

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
The time multiplier setting of the negative

10 50/51Q2.TMS 0.05~100.0 0.001
The minimum operation time setting of the
11 50/51Q2.tmin 0~100s 0.001s
negative sequence IDMT overcurrent protection
Constant “k” for the negative sequence IDMT
12 50/51Q2.K 0.001~120.0 0.0001
Constant “C” for the negative sequence IDMT
13 50/51Q2.C 0.00~1.00 0.0001
Constant “α” for the negative sequence IDMT
14 50/51Q2.Alpha 0.01~3.00 0.0001
7.3.7 Broken Conductor Protection Settings
The broken conductor protection settings (in the submenu “BrknCond Settings”) are used to
determine the characteristic of the broken conductor protection.
All the settings of the broken conductor protection are listed in the following table.

The ratio setting for the broken conductor
1 50BC.I2/I1_Set 0.10~1.00 0.001
protection
The time setting for the broken conductor
2 50BC.t_Op 0~200s 0.001s
protection
The logic setting for the broken conductor
3 50BC.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the broken conductor 0x0000 ~
4 50BC.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
7.3.8 Breaker Failure Protection Settings
The breaker failure protection settings (in the submenu “BFP Settings”) are used to determine the
characteristic of the breaker failure protection.
All the settings of the breaker failure protection are listed in the following table.

The current s etting of the breaker failure
1 50BF.I_Set 0.05In~5.0In 0.001A
protection
2 50BF.t_Op The time setting of the breaker failure protection 0~100s 0.001s
The re-trip time setting of the breaker failure
3 50BF.t_ReTrp 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The setting for selecting the criteria logic of the
4 50BF.Opt_LogicMode 1~4 1
5 50BF.En The logic setting of the breaker failure protection 0~1 1
The logic setting of the re-trip function of the
6 50BF.En_ReTrp 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
The output matrix setting of the breaker failure 0x0000 ~

7 50BF.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
The output matrix setting of the re-trip function of 0x0000 ~
8 50BF.OutMap_ReTrp 1
the breaker failure protection 0x3FFF
1. The setting [50BF.Opt_LogicMode] is used to select the criteria logic of the breaker failure
protection. Four criteria logics based on the phase currents and the circuit breaker state
(based on the binary input [BI_52b]) are supported in this relay.
The two criteria conditions are list as below:
(A) The maximum phase current is greater than the setting [50BF.I_Set].
(B) The circuit breaker is still closed ([BI_52b] = 0).
Setting Value Criteria Condition Logic

1 Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set] Only A
2 NOT([BI_52b]) Only B
3 (Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set]) OR (NOT([BI_52b])) A OR B
4 (Ipmax > [50BF.I_Set]) AND (NOT([BI_52b])) A AND B
7.3.9 SOTF Protection Settings
The SOTF protection settings (in the submenu “SOTF Settings”) are used to determine the
characteristic of the SOTF protection.
All the settings of the SOTF protection are listed in the following table.

1 SOTF.t_En The enabling time setting of the SOTF protection 0~100s 0.001s
The setting for s electing the acceleration tripping
2 SOTF.Opt_ Mode 0~1 1
mode of the SOTF protection
The current s etting of the SOTF o vercurrent
3 50PSOTF.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection
The time setting of the SOTF overcurrent
4 50PSOTF.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The logic s etting of the SOTF o vercurrent
5 50PSOTF.En 0~1 1
protection
The output matrix setting of the SOTF o vercurrent 0x0000 ~
6 50PSOTF.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
The current setting of the zero sequence SOTF
7 50GSOTF.3I0_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
The time setting of the zero sequence SOTF
8 50GSOTF.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
The logic setting of the zero sequence SOTF
9 50GSOTF.En 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
The output matrix setting of the zero sequence 0x0000 ~

10 50GSOTF.OutMap 1
SOTF o vercurrent protection 0x3FFF
1. The setting [SOTF.t_En] is used to enable the SOTF protection for the appointed time delay,
when the enabling conditions are satisfied (See Section 3.10).
2. The setting [SOTF.Opt_Mode] is used for selecting the acceleration tripping mode of the
SOTF protection. Setting as “1” means accelerated tripping before auto-reclosing; and setting
as “0” means accelerated tripping after auto-reclosing.
7.3.10 Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection Settings
The overvoltage and undervoltage protection settings (in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”) are
used to determine the characteristic of the overvoltage and undervoltage protections.
All the settings of the overvoltage and undervoltage protections are listed in the following table.

The setting for s electing the undervoltage
1 27P.Opt_1P/3P 0~1 1
for the undervoltage protection
3 27P1.U_Set 2~120V 0.001V
protection
4 27P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
5 27P1.K_DropOut 1.01~3.0 0.001
6 27P1.En 0~1 1
protection
7 27P1.OutMap 1
8 27P2.U_Set 2~120V 0.001V
protection
9 27P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
10 27P2.K_DropOut 1.01~3.0 0.001
11 27P2.En 0~1 1
protection
12 27P2.OutMap 1
The setting for s electing the overvoltage
13 59P.Opt_1P/3P 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

14 59P.Opt_Up/Upp 0~1 1
for the overvoltage protection
15 59P1.U_Set 57.7~200V 0.001V
protection
16 59P1.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
The dropout coefficient setting of the s tage 1
17 59P1.K_DropOut 0.93~0.99 0.001
18 59P1.En 0~1 1
protection
19 59P1.OutMap 1
20 59P2.U_Set 57.7~200V 0.001V
protection
21 59P2.t_Op 0~100s 0.001s
protection
22 59P2.K_DropOut 0.93~0.99 0.001
23 59P2.En 0~1 1
protection
24 59P2.OutMap 1
1. See Section 3.10 and Section 3.11 for more details about the settings [27P.Opt_1P/3P],
[27P.Opt_Up/Upp], [59P.Opt_1P/3P] and [59P.Opt_Up/Upp].
7.3.11 Mechanical Protection Settings
The mechanical protection settings (in submenu “MR Prot Settings”) are used to determine the
characteristic of the mechanical protection.
All the settings of the mechanical protection are listed in the following table.

1 MR1.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
2 MR1.En 0~1 1
protection
3 MR1.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
4 MR2.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
5 MR2.En 0~1 1
protection

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

6 MR2.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
7 MR3.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
8 MR3.En 0~1 1
protection
9 MR3.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
10 MR4.t_Op 0~4000s 0.001s
protection
11 MR4.En 0~1 1
protection
12 MR4.OutMap 1
protection 0x3FFF
7.3.12 Auto-recloser Settings

The auto-recloser settings (in submenu “AR Settings”) are used to determine the characteristic of
the auto-recloser.
All the settings of the auto-recloser are listed in the following table.

The time setting of the minimum time delay for
1 79.t_CBClsd 0.01~600s 0.001s
ensuring the CB is closed
The time pulse width for ensuring the AR blocking
2 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.01~600s 0.001s
signal
The time setting of the time delay for ensuring the
3 79.t_CBReady 0.01~600s 0.001s
CB is ready
The time setting of the time delay for checking the
4 79.t_Fail 0.01~600s 0.001s
CB position
5 79.t_3PS1 The time setting of the 1 st shot auto-recloser 0~600s 0.001s
nd
rd
th
9 79.t_Reclaim The reclaim time setting of the auto-recloser 0~600s 0.001s
10 79.t_DDO_AR The pulse width of the auto-recloser 0-4.00s 0.001s
11 79.N_Rcls The shot number setting of the auto-recloser 1~4 1
12 79.En_SynChk 0~1 1
function of the auto-recloser
13 79.En_DdChk 0~1 1
auto-recloser
The logic setting of the CB position check function
14 79.En_FailChk 0~1 1
of the auto-recloser
15 79.En The logic setting of the auto-recloser 0~1 1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
0x0000 ~
16 79.OutMap The output matrix setting of the auto-recloser 1
0x3FFF
1. If the settings [79.En_SynChk] and [79.En_DdChk] are both set as “0”, it means that the
non-check mode is applied in the auto-reclosing logic.
7.3.13 Supervision Element Settings

The supervision element settings (in the submenu “Superv Settings”) are used to determine the
parameters of the supervision element.
All the settings of the supervision element are listed in the following table.

1 CTS.3I0_Set The threshold current setting of the CTS element 0.05In~30In 0.001A
2 CTS.3U0_Set The threshold voltage setting of the CTS element 0.01~120V 0.001V
3 CTS.En The logic setting of the CTS element 0~1 1
The phase current setting of the protection VTS
4 VTS.I_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
element
The negative sequence current setting of the
5 VTS.I2_Set 0.05In~30In 0.001A
protection VTS element
6 VTS.En The logic setting of the protection VTS element 0~1 1
The logic setting of the synchro-check VTS
7 VTS.En_Syn VT 0~1 1
element
7.3.14 Binary Output Matrix Settings
The binary output matrix settings (in the submenu “CfgBO Settings”) are used to determine the
parameters of the last eight binary outputs in module NR4304 and NR4521.
All the settings of the binary outputs are listed in the following table.

1 B09.BO_03.t_Dwell The dwell time of the output “B09.BO_03” 0~100s 0.001s
2 B09.BO_04.t_Dwell The dwell time of the output “B09.BO_04" 0~100s 0.001s

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
1. The setting [Bxx.BO_xx.t_Dwell] (x: a number; 1, 2 etc.) is used to set the dwell time of the
relevant binary output in module NR4304 and NR4521.
7.4 Monitor and Control Settings
The monitor and control settings (in the submenu “BCU Settings”) are used to determine the
parameters of the monitor and control function of this relay.
7.4.1 Closing Synchronism Check Settings
The closing synchronism check settings (in the submenu “Syn Settings”) are used to determine
the settings of the closing synchronism check function.
All the settings of the closing synchronism check function are listed in the following table.

3 25.U_Comp 0.2~5.0 0.001
4 25.phi_Comp 0~360° 1°
5 25.Opt_Usyn 0~5 1
closing function
6 25.t_ClsCB 0.02~1.00s 0.001s
The voltage difference setting of the manual
7 25M.U_Diff 2~120V 0.001V
The frequency difference setting of the manual
8 25M.f_Diff 0~2Hz 0.001Hz
The frequency rate-of-change setting of the 0.001
9 25M.df/dt 0~3Hz/s
manual closing synchronism check function Hz/s
The phase angle difference setting of the manual
10 25M.phi_Diff 0~60° 1°
The waiting time setting of the manual closing
11 25M.t_Wait 0.01~600s 0.001s
12 25M.Opt_DdChk 1~7 1
the manual closing function
13 25M.En_SynChk 0~1 1
function of the manual closing function
14 25M.En_DdChk 0~1 1
manual closing function
The voltage difference setting of the auto-closing
15 25A.U_Diff 2~120V 0.001V

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
The frequency difference setting of the

16 25A.f_Diff 0~2Hz 0.001Hz
The phase angle difference setting of the
17 25A.phi_Diff 0~60° 1°
The waiting time setting of the auto-closing
18 25A.t_Wait 0.01~600s 0.001s
19 25A.Opt_DdChk 1~7 1
the auto-closing synchronism check function
The time setting of the dead check function of the
20 25A.t_DdChk 0.01~25s 0.001s
auto-closer
The time setting of the synchronism check
21 25A.t_SynChk 0.01~25s 0.001s
function of the auto-closer
1. The settings [25.U_Comp] and [25.phi_Comp] are used to compensate the synchro-check
voltage, and make the compensated synchro-check voltage is equal to the corresponding
protection voltage in normal operation situation.
The settings [25.U_Comp] and [25.phi_Comp] can be set according to following formula.
[25.U _ Comp]  U Pr ot _ Normal  U Syn _ Normal


[25. phi _ Comp]   Pr ot _ Normal   Syn _ Normal
In general application, the setting [25.U_Comp] is set as “1.000”, and the setting
[25.phi_Comp] is set as “0°”.
For example, the synchro-check voltage and the protection are gotten from different sides of
a power transformer respectively.
a) Synchro-check VT: 400kV Primary, 110V Secondary
b) Protection VT: 200kV Primary, 100V Secondary
c) Power transformer: 400kV / 200kV, vector group Yd11
The synchro-check VT supplies 110V secondary rated voltage while the protection VT
supplies 100V secondary rated voltage. Therefore, this difference must be balanced:
[25.U_Comp] = 100V / 110V = 0.91
The transformer vector group is defined from the high voltage side to the low voltage side. In
this example, the synchro-check voltage is one of the voltages of the high voltage side, i.e.
the compensation angle setting is 30°(according to the vector group):
[25.phi_Comp] = 30°
2. The setting [25.Opt_Usyn] is used to select the synchro-check voltage source of the
synchronism check element, and this relay can use the corresponding protection voltage for
the synchronism check element.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5
Voltage Type Ua Ub Uc Uab Ubc Uca
7.4.2 Manual Control Settings

The manual control settings (in the submenu “Control Settings”) are used to determine the
parameters of the manual control function (local or remote closing and tripping) .
All the settings of the manual control are listed in the following table.

The output pulse width of the No.1 manual
1 Ctrl1.t_PW_Opn 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
tripping element
The output pulse width of the No.1 manual closing
2 Ctrl1.t_PW_Cls 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
element
The output matrix setting of the No.1 manual 0x0000 ~
3 Ctrl1.OutMap_Opn 1
tripping element 0x3FFF
4 Ctrl1.OutMap_Cls 1
closing element 0x3FFF
5 Ctrl2.t_PW_Opn 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
tripping element
6 Ctrl2.t_PW_Cls 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
element
9 Ctrl3.t_PW_Opn 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
tripping element
10 Ctrl3.t_PW_Cls 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
element
13 Ctrl4.t_PW_Opn 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
tripping element
14 Ctrl4.t_PW_Cls 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
element
17 Ctrl5.t_PW_Opn 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
tripping element

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

18 Ctrl5.t_PW_Cls 0.1~99.0s 0.001s
element
7.4.3 Interlock Settings
The interlock settings (in the submenu “Interlock Settings”) are used to determine whether the
interlock check of the manual control function (local or remote closing and tripping) is enabled .
All the settings of the interlock check function are listed in the following table.

The logic setting of the interlock check of the No.1
1 Interlock1.En_BlkOpn 0~1 1
manual tripping element
2 Interlock1.En_BlkCls 0~1 1
manual closing element
1. The interlock check function can be programmed through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool
auxiliary software.
7.5 Logic Link Settings
The logic link settings (in the submenu “Logic Links”) are used to determine whether the relevant
function of this relay is enabled or disabled. If this relay supports the logic link function, it will have
a corresponding submenu in the submenu “Logic Links” for the logic link settings.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
7.5.1 Function Link Settings
The function link settings (in the submenu “Function Links”) are used to determine whether the
relevant functional elements are enabled or disabled.
7.5.2 Spare Link Settings

The spare link settings (in the submenu “Spare Links”) are used for future application. It can be
defined as one of above three link settings through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool.
7.6 Device Related Settings
The device related settings (in the submenu “Device Setup”) are used for setting the operation
parameters and communication parameters of this device.
7.6.1 Device Settings
The device settings (in the submenu “Device Settings”) are used for setting the operation
parameters of this device.
The following table lists all the communication parameters.

The encoding type of the HDR waveform file, it is
1 HDR_EncodeMode 0~1 1
only reserved for the manufacturer
The language of the group caption when the
2 Opt_Caption_103 0~2 1
IEC60870-5-103 is adopted
3 B07.Un_BinaryInput The rated voltage value of the binary input 0~5 1
4 En_DedicatedMeasmtCT The source of the metering current values 0~1 1
5 En_MDisk The logic setting of the moveable disk 0~1 1
6 Th_ZeroDrift The threshold of the zero drift percent value 0~100% 0.1
1. The setting [Opt_Caption_103] is used for selecting the language of the group caption when
the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is adopted. If it is set as “1”, the group caption language is
Chinese; if it is set as “2”, the group caption language is English; and if it is set as “0”, the
group caption language is the language which is selected through the submenu “Language”.
2. The setting [B07.Un_BinaryInput] is used for selecting the rated voltage of the binary input.
Rated Voltage 24V 48V 110V 220V 30V 125V
3. The setting [En_DedicatedMeasmtCT] is used for selecting the source of the metering
current values. If it is set as “1”, the calculation of the metering current values is based on the
sampled data from the dedicated metering current transformers of this relay; and if it is s et as
“0”, the calculation of the metering current values is based on the sampled data from the
protection current transformers of this relay.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
4. The setting [En_MDisk] is used to decide whether the moveable disk is in service. “1”(Enable):
Use a moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function; “0”(Disable): Moveable disk
will be disabled. A moveable disk is implemented on the main CPU module to backup and
restore programs, settings and configurations.
7.6.2 Communication Settings

The communication settings (in the submenu “Comm Settings”) are used for communication with
substation monitoring system, substation controlling system or remote SCADA.
The following table lists all the communication parameters.
No. Menu text Explanation Range

1 IEDName The name of this IED equipment 1~16 Characters
2 IP_LAN1 The IP address of the No.1 Ethernet port 000.000.000.000
3 Mask_LAN1 The mask code of the No.1 Ethernet port ~255.255.255.255
6 En_LAN2 The logic setting of the No.2 Ethernet network 0~1
The IP address of the network gateway of this 000.000.000.000
13 Gateway
device ~255.255.255.255
The logic setting of the UDP broadcast function
14 En_Broadcast 0~1
when the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is adopted
15 Addr_RS485A The communication address of the serial port A 0 ~ 255
The communication baud rate of the serial port
16 Baud_RS485A 0~5
A
17 Protocol_RS485A The communication protocol of the serial port A 0~2
18 Addr_RS485B The communication address of the serial port B 0 ~ 255
The communication baud rate of the serial port
19 Baud_RS485B 0~5
B
20 Protocol_RS485B The communication protocol of the serial port B 0~2
The metering value change differentiate percent
21 Threshold_Measmt_Net 0 ~ 100 (%)
for Ethernet uplink communication
The time setting of circularly sending metering
22 Period_Measmt_Net 0 ~ 65535s
for the IEC60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 protocol
The metering data format for the
23 Format_Measmt 0~1
IEC60870-5-103 protocol
24 Baud_Printer The baud rate of the print port 0~5
25 En_AutoPrint The logic setting of the auto-printing function 0~1

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
26 Opt_TimeSyn The time synchronization mode 0~3

000.000.000.000
27 IP_Server_SNTP The IP address of the SNTP server
~255.255.255.255
28 OffsetHour_UTC The hour code of the time zone -12 ~ 12
29 OffsetMinute_UTC The minute code of the time zone 0 ~ 60
The cycle number setting of the wave recording
30 ReDur_PreTrigDFR 0 ~ 50
function before pickup of a trigger element
31 DNP_Port_Number The Ethernet port number the DNP3.0 protocol 0 ~ 65535
32 En_TCP1_DNP The logic setting of the No.1 network DNP client 0~1
The slave address of the No.1 network DNP
33 Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP 0 ~ 65519
client
The master address of the No.1 network DNP
34 Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP 0 ~ 65519
client
000.000.000.000
35 IP_Master_TCP1_DNP The IP address of the No.1 network DNP client
~255.255.255.255
The communication map of the No.1 network
36 Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP 0~4
DNP client
The “OBJ1” default variation of the No.1
37 Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 0~1
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
The timeout of application layer of the No.1
42 t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP 1 ~ 5s
network DNP client
The heartbeat time interval of the No.1 network
43 t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP 0 ~ 7200s
DNP client
The logic setting of the unsolicited message
44 En_UR_TCP1_DNP 0~1
function of the No.1 network DNP client
The online retransmission number of the
45 Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP unsolicited message of the No.1 network DNP 2 ~ 10
client
The offline timeout of the unsolicited message
46 t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP 1 ~ 5000s
of the No.1 network DNP client
The class level of the “Binary Input” of the No.1
47 Class_BI_TCP1_DNP 0~3
network DNP client
The class level of the “Analog Input” of the No.1
48 Class_AI_TCP1_DNP 0~3
network DNP client

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
The selection timeout of the No.1 network DNP

49 t_Select_TCP1_DNP 0 ~ 240s
client
The time interval of the time synchronization
50 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP 0 ~ 3600s
client
client
000.000.000.000
~255.255.255.255
DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
DNP client
client
network DNP client
network DNP client
client

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

client
client
000.000.000.000
~255.255.255.255
DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
DNP client
client
network DNP client
network DNP client
client
client
client
000.000.000.000
~255.255.255.255

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
network DNP client
DNP client
client
network DNP client
network DNP client
client
1. Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user maybe
only show some settings of them according to the communication interface configuration. If
only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports ( port A and port B) are
not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet ports only listed in this
submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.
2. The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined when
ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet numbers and the
unused port/ports need not to be configured. If the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary
software is connected with this device through the Ethernet, the IP address of the
PCS-Explorer must be set as one of the available IP address of this device.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
3. The setting [En_Broadcast] is used to enable or disable this relay to transmit the UDP
broadcast messages when the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is adopted. If it is set as “0”, this
relay does not transmit any UDP broadcast message; and if it is set as “1”, this relay can
transmit UDP broadcast messages.
4. The setting [Addr_RS485A] and [Addr_RS485B] are used to set the communication address
of the serial ports (port A and port B); if a protocol over serial communication is adopted.
5. The settings [Baud_RS485A], [Baud_RS485B] and [Baud_Printer] are respectively used to

set the communication baudrate of each serial port (port A, port B and print port).
Baudrate (bsp) 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200
6. The settings [Protocol_RS485A] and [Protocol_RS485B] are respectively used to set the
communication protocol of each serial port (port A and port B): “0” is “IEC60870-5-103”; “1” is
“ModBus”; and “2” is “DNP3.0”.
Setting Value 0 1 2
Protocol IEC60870-5-103 ModBus DNP3.0
7. The setting [Threshold_Measmt_Net] is used to decide whether the present metering value is
sends forward. Only the change percent of a metering value is greater than this setting, the
relevant metering value can be sent forward.
8. The circle time for sending telemetering [Period_Measmt_Net]: It represents the time period
when this device sends metering data forward. When this setting is set as “0”, it means that
the equipment will not send metering data forward at a fixed time (the inquiry issued by
SCADA still can be responded during this period). This setting may be set according to actual
field condition and can be set as “0” when the communication function is not used. The
default value is “0” when the equipment is delivered.
9. The setting [Format_Measmt] is used to select the metering data format in the GDD (Generic
Data Description) message when the IEC60870-5-103 protocol is adopted. If it is set as “0”,
the metering data format type is “12” (Measurand with Quality Descriptor); and if it is set as
“1”, the metering data format type is “7” (R32.23, IEEE 754).
10. The setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is used to select the external time synchronization source.
Setting Value External Time Synchronization Mode

Electrical signal time synchronization mode: PPS signal (RS-485), IRIG-B
0
signal (RS-485), PPM signal (Binary input), PPS signal (Binary input)
Message time synchronization mode: SNTP protocol (unicast or broadcast),
1
other SAS time synchronization message (such as IEC60870-5-103) etc.
Extension module time synchronization mode: PPS signal (Optical interface),
2
IRIG-B signal (Optical interface)
3 No external time synchronization source
If this setting is set as “1”, if this device does not receive time synchronization message or

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings
receives error time synchronization message, it will alarm; and if this setting is set as “0” or
“2”, if this device does not receive the time synchronization signal, it will alarm and switch to
message time synchronization mode automatically.
11. The setting [IP_Server_SNTP] is used to set the IP address of the SNTP server, if this relay
adopts the SNTP time synchronization. If the SNTP time synchronization is not adopted, it is
recommended to set as “000.000.000.000”.
12. If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages
are required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone
th
of China is east 8 time zone, so this setting is set as “8”. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is
used to set the minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.
Time zone GMT zone East 1 st East 2nd East 3rd East 4th East 5 th
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5
th th th th th
Time zone East 6 East 7 East 8 East 9 East 10 East 11 th
Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11
th st nd rd th
Time zone East/West 12 West 1 West 2 West 3 West 4 West 5th
Setting -12/12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5
th th th th th
Time zone West 6 West 7 West 8 West 9 West 10 West 11 th
Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11
13. The setting [ReDur_PreTrigDFR] is used to configure the cycle number setting of the wave
recording function before pickup of a trigger element.
14. The setting [DNP_Port_Number] is used to configure Ethernet port number if the DNP3.0
protocol is adopted.
7.7 Copy Settings
It (the submenu “Copy Settings”) is used to copy the active settings to another group, see
Section 8.2.6.3 for more details.

Date: 2015-12-01
7 Settings

Date: 2015-12-01
Table of Contents
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................8-1

8.1.1 Design ............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Functionality .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Keypad and Keys............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.4 LED indications................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.5 Control Buttons ................................................................................................................ 8-3
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ................................................................................8-4

8.2.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.2 Default Display under Normal Operation Condition .......................................................... 8-4
8.2.3 Submenu of “Measurements” ........................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.4 Submenu of “Status” ........................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.5 Submenu of “Records” ................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.6 Submenu of “Settings” ................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.7 Submenu of “Print”......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.2.8 Submenu of “Local Cmd” ............................................................................................... 8-21
8.2.9 Submenu of “Information” .............................................................................................. 8-25
8.2.10 Submenu of “Test”........................................................................................................ 8-26
8.2.11 Submenu of “Clock” ..................................................................................................... 8-28
8.2.12 Submenu of “Language” .............................................................................................. 8-29
8.3 Understand the LCD Display ................................................................................. 8-29

8.3.1 Display When Tripping ................................................................................................... 8-29
8.3.2 Display under Abnormal Condition ................................................................................. 8-32
8.4 Password Protection ............................................................................................... 8-35
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Keypad on the front panel ................................................................................. 8-2

Date: 2015-12-01
Figure 8.1-2 LED indicators.................................................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 Control buttons.................................................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8.2-1 Default display in normal situation ................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8.2-2 Main menu display of this relay ........................................................................ 8-4
Figure 8.2-3 Tree diagram of total command menu .............................................................. 8-5
Figure 8.2-4 LCD display of the protection secondary measurement values ..................... 8-6
Figure 8.2-5 LCD display of the status of the general binary inputs.................................... 8-9
Figure 8.2-6 History fault report on LCD ............................................................................. 8-14
Figure 8.2-7 History alarm report on LCD ........................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8.2-8 History binary state change report on LCD .................................................... 8-15
Figure 8.2-9 History user operation report on LCD ............................................................ 8-16
Figure 8.2-10 History control report on LCD ....................................................................... 8-16
Figure 8.2-11 LCD display of the selection of setting group number ................................ 8-18
Figure 8.2-12 LCD display of the selected protection settings .......................................... 8-18
Figure 8.2-13 LCD display of the change of active group .................................................. 8-20
Figure 8.2-14 Control object and command selection interfaces ...................................... 8-24
Figure 8.2-15 Control execution check and interlock selection interfaces ....................... 8-24
Figure 8.2-16 Control type selection interface and execution result interface ................. 8-24
Figure 8.2-17 LCD display of the software version ............................................................. 8-25
Figure 8.2-18 LCD display of the board information........................................................... 8-26
Figure 8.2-19 Clock modification interface ......................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8.2-20 Language modification interface .................................................................. 8-29
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of trip report ................................................................................ 8-30
Figure 8.3-2 Information of alarm report on the LCD.......................................................... 8-32
Figure 8.4-1 Password input interface for control operation and setting modification .... 8-35
Figure 8.4-2 Password input interface for modifying settings ........................................... 8-35

Date: 2015-12-01
8.1 Overview
Human machine interface (HMI) is an important component of the equipment. It is a convenient

facility to access the relay from the front local control panel of this relay to view desired information,
such as measurement quantity or binary inputs’ state or program version etc. or modify some
system settings or protection settings. This function is very helpful during commissioning before
putting the equipment into service.
Furthermore, all above functions can be realized in a remote terminal with special software
through a communication bus via a RS-485 port or an Ethernet port.
This chapter will describe human machine interface (HMI), menu tree and LCD display of the
equipment. In addition, how to input settings using keypad is described in detail.
8.1.1 Design
The human machine interface consists of a human machine interface (HMI) module which allows
the communication as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module includes:
 A 240×128-dot matrix backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status,
fault diagnostics and setting etc.
 Twenty LED indicators on the front panel of this relay for denoting the status of this protection
operation, the color and trigger condition of each LED can be configured through
PCS-Explorer.
 A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.
 An Ethernet interface special for the PCS-Explorer configuration tool; for more details, see the
PCS-Explorer online help brochure or the PCS-Explorer configuration tool instruction manual.
 Three buttons and a remote/local control switch with two LED indicators for controlling circuit
breaker and releasing the interlock check logics, if the front panel with control buttons is
selected.
The front panel of the device is shown in Figure 6.1-2 and Figure 6.1-3.
8.1.2 Functionality
 The HMI module helps to draw your attention to something that has occurred which may
activate a LED or a report display on the LCD.
 You as the operator may have own interest to view a certain data.
 Use menus navigate through menu commands and to locate the data of interest.
8.1.3 Keypad and Keys

The keypad and keys on the front panel of the equipment provide convenience to the operator to
view a certain data or change the device’s setting. The keypad contains nine keys, and each key
has different function to the other one.

Date: 2015-12-01
Key Sign Description

“▲”, “▼”, “◄”, “►” Mo ve between selectable branches of the menu tree.
“+”, “–” Change parameters or settings .
ENT Confirm/Execute present operation.
GRP Fast change the setting group number.
ESC Exit the present level menu to main menu, or cancel present operation.
The following figure shows the keypad and keys.
P
GR
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-1 Ke ypad on the front panel
8.1.4 LED indications

There are twenty LED indicators, which can indicate the operation state of the device. The
LED_03 to LED_20 is configurable through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software,
and the following figure shows the default LED configuration on the front panel of the device.
01 HEALTHY 11
01 HEALTHY
02 ALARM 12
03 13
Recommended 02 ALARM
04 14
05 15
LED_03 ~ LED_06 are configured as
03 TRIP
06 16
shown in left side, and other LEDs
07 17 (LED_07 ~ LED_20) are configured 04 RECLOSE
08 18 according to the practical requirement
09 19 through the PCS-PC software. 05 CB OPEN
10 20
LED_03 ~ LED_20 are configurable 06 CB CLOSE
Figure 8.1-2 LED indicators
Label Display Remarks

When this relay is not energized or any hardware defect is detected
Off
HEALTHY during self-supervision.
Steady Green When this relay is in service and ready for operation.
Off When this relay is in normal operating situation.
AL ARM
Steady Yellow When any abnormality alarm is issued.
TRIP
Steady Red When any protection element is operated.
RECLOSE
Steady Red When the auto-recloser operates.
Off When the circuit breaker is closed.
CB OPEN
Steady Red When the circuit breaker is opened.

Date: 2015-12-01
Off When the circuit breaker is opened.

CB CLOSE
Steady Green When the circuit breaker is closed.
 The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by supplying power to this device again or
rebooting this device.
 The “ALARM ” LED is turned on as long as alarm exists. When alarm signals disappear, it will
be turned off.
 The “TRIP” LED is turned on once any protection element operates and keeps being on even
after the trip command goes off.
 The “RECLOSE” LED is turned on once auto-recloser operates and remains keeps being on
even after the auto-reclosing command goes off.
 The “CB OPEN” LED is turned on once when the circuit breaker is in open position.
 The “CB CLOSE” LED is turned on once when the circuit breaker is in closing position.
 The “TRIP” and “RECLOSE” LEDs and relevant latched binary outputs can be reset by pressing
the key “ENT”+“ESC”, by energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg] or by executing the
submenu “Reset Target”.
8.1.5 Control Buttons
If the front panel with control buttons is selected, there are three buttons, a remote/local control
switch and three LED indicators for controlling circuit breaker and releasing the interlock check
logics. The control buttons is shown in following figure.
R
L
Figure 8.1-3 Control buttons
Buttons Remarks
The button is used to close the circuit breaker if the local control mode is selecte d. Press
it down for longer than 3s, this device will output a CB closing signal.
The button is used to open the circuit breaker if the local control mode is selected. Press
it down for longer than 3s, this device will output a CB opening signal.
The button is used to release the interlock check logics . Press it down for longer than 3s,
the LED state is changed. If the LED is on, the interlock check logics are released.

Date: 2015-12-01
The button is used to select the control mode of the circuit breaker. Press it down, the
R
L
remote control mode is selected and the LED “R” is on; press it up, the local control
mode is selected and the LED “L” is on.
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree
8.2.1 Overview
In this section, the main layout of the menu which is shown on the LCD of the local human
machine interface (HMI) will be described in detail.
8.2.2 Default Display under Normal Operation Condition
The default display on the LCD is shown as below when the device is in normal situation.
S 2011-01-25 11:18:25
Ida 0.011 A
Idb 0.012 A
Idc 0.009 A
Ia 1.198 A
Ib 1.203 A
Addr 188 Group 01
Figure 8.2-1 Default display in normal situation
The first line shows the time synchronization state and the current time of this relay. The sign “S”
on left-top side means this relay receive the clock synchronization signal correctly; if there has
nothing on left-top side, it means the time synchronization is not correct. The current time format of
this relay is “yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss”. The middle part of the LCD shows the measurement for the
protection. The last line shows the last section of the IP address and the setting group number.
When the default screen is being shown, press key “▲” to enter the main menu of this relay.
Measurements
Status
Records
Settings
Print
Local Cmd
Figure 8.2-2 Main menu display of this relay
The following figure shows the menu tree structure of this device.

Date: 2015-12-01
MainMenu
Measurements Settings Local Cmd
Measurements1 System_Settings Reset Target

Measurements2 Prot Settings Trig Oscillograph
BCU Settings Download
Logic Links Clear Counter
Device Setup Clear Interlock File
Status Clear Energy Counter
Control
Inputs
Outputs Information
Superv State Print
Version Info
Device Info Board Info
Settings
Test
Disturb Records
Records
Superv Events Device Test
Disturb Records IO Events AC Auto Calbr
Superv Events Device Status Disturb Record Items
IO Events Waveforms
Clock
Device Logs IEC103 Info
Control Logs Cancel Print Language
Figure 8.2-3 Tree diagram of total command menu
Press key “▲”, “▼”, “◄” or “►” to select a submenu and the press key “ENT” to show the details.
NOTICE!
This manual introduces all the submenus and their functions which maybe can be
supplied by this relay. Some submenus are not configured if the relevant functions are
not supported in this relay. So the practical submenus of this relay should be taken as
final and binding.
8.2.3 Submenu of “Measurements”
Purpose:
This menu is used to view the measured values including current, voltage, phase angle and other
calculated quantities.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Measurements” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering
the main menu of this device.
Submenu structure tree:
The submenu “Measurements” has following submenus.
No. Item Description

1 Measurements1 To display the measurement values for protection
2 Measurements2 To display the measurement values for metering

Date: 2015-12-01
The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus.

1 Primary Values To display the primary measurement values for protection
2 Secondary Values To display the secondary measurement values for protection
The submenu “Measurements2” has following submenus.

1 Primary Values To display the primary measurement values for metering
2 Secondary Values To display the secondary measurement values for metering
3 Primary Power To display the primary power values for metering
4 Secondary Power To display the secondary power values for metering
8.2.3.1 View Measurements
Here takes viewing the secondary protection measurement values as an example to introduce the
operating steps of viewing the measurements.
Operating steps:
1. Press key “▲” to enter the main menu in the default displaying situation.
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Measurements” and press key
“ENT” to enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Measurements1” and press key
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Secondary Values” and press
key “ENT” to enter this submenu.
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to view the expected measured values.
Secondary Values
Ida 0.010 A
Idb 0.012 A
Idc 0.009 A
Ia_Rmt 1.245 A
Ia_Rmt 1.247 A
Ic_Rmt 1.243 A
Ia 1.248 A
Figure 8.2-4 LCD display of the protection secondary measurement values
The following tables show all the measurement values of this relay.
 Protection measurement values
No. Symbol Description

1 Ida Differential current value of the phase A
2 Idb Differential current value of the phase B

Date: 2015-12-01
3 Idc Differential current value of the phase C

4 Ia_Rmt Current value of phase A of opposite side
5 Ib_Rmt Current value of phase B of opposite side
6 Ic_Rmt Current value of phase C of opposite side
7 Ia Current value of phase A
8 Ib Current value of phase B
9 Ic Current value of phase C
10 I1 Positive sequence current value
11 I2 Negative sequence current value
12 3I0_Cal Self-calculated zero sequence current value
13 3I0_Ext1 The external zero sequence current value
14 3I0_SEF Sensitive zero sequence current value
15 Ua Voltage value of phase A
16 Ub Voltage value of phase B
17 Uc Voltage value of phase C
18 Uab Voltage value of phase A to phase B
19 Ubc Voltage value of phase B to phase C
20 Uca Voltage value of phase C to phase A
21 U1 Positive sequence voltage value
22 U2 Negative sequence voltage value
23 3U0_Cal Self-calculated zero sequence voltage value
24 Ux Synchro-check voltage value
25 f System frequency value
26 Ang(Ia-Ib) Angle of phase A current and phase B current
27 Ang(Ib-Ic) Angle of phase B current and phase C current
28 Ang(Ic-Ia) Angle of phase C current and phase A current
29 Ang(Ua-Ia) Angle of phase A voltage and phase A current
30 Ang(Ub-Ib) Angle of phase B voltage and phase B current
31 Ang(Uc-Ic) Angle of phase C voltage and phase C current
32 Ang(Ua-Ub) Angle of phase A voltage and phase B voltage
33 Ang(Ub-Uc) Angle of phase B voltage and phase C voltage
34 Ang(Uc-Ua) Angle of phase C voltage and phase A voltage
35 Ang(Uab-Ux) Angle of phase-to-phase voltage “Uab” and synchro-check voltage
36 Ang(3U0-3I0_Cal) Angle of the self-calculated zero sequence voltage and current
37 Ang(Ia_Loc-Ia_Rmt) Angle of the phase A currents of two sides (local and remote side)
38 Ang(Ib_Loc-Ib_Rmt) Angle of the phase B currents of two sides (local and remote side)
39 Ang(Ic_Loc-Ic_Rmt) Angle of the phase C currents of two sides (local and remote side)
 Metering measurement values

1 Ia Current value of the phase A
2 Ib Current value of the phase B
3 Ic Current value of the phase C

Date: 2015-12-01
4 Ua Voltage value of phase A

5 Ub Voltage value of phase B
6 Uc Voltage value of phase C
7 Uab Voltage value of phase A to phase B
8 Ubc Voltage value of phase B to phase C
9 Uca Voltage value of phase C to phase A
10 f System frequency value
11 Ang(Ia-Ib) Angle of phase A current and phase B current
12 Ang(Ib-Ic) Angle of phase B current and phase C current
13 Ang(Ic-Ia) Angle of phase C current and phase A current
14 Ang(Ua-Ia) Angle of phase A voltage and phase A current
15 Ang(Ub-Ib) Angle of phase B voltage and phase B current
16 Ang(Uc-Ic) Angle of phase C voltage and phase C current
17 Ang(Ua-Ub) Angle of phase A voltage and phase B voltage
18 Ang(Ub-Uc) Angle of phase B voltage and phase C voltage
19 Ang(Uc-Ua) Angle of phase C voltage and phase A voltage
 Power measurement values

1 P Acti ve power
2 Q Reactive power
3 COS Power factor
4 PHr+ Outgoing active energy
5 QHr+ Outgoing reactive energy
6 PHr- Incoming active energy
7 QHr- Incoming reactive energy
8.2.4 Submenu of “Status”
Purpose:
This menu is used to view the state of the binary inputs, binary outputs and supervision alarm
elements of this relay.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Status” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the main
menu of this device.
The submenu “Status” has following submenus.

1 Inputs To display the state of the binary inputs
2 Outputs To display the state of the binary outputs
3 Superv State To display the state of supervision alarm signals

Date: 2015-12-01
The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus.

1 Contact Inputs To display the state of the general binary inputs
2 GOOSE Inputs To display the state of the GOOSE binary inputs
3 Prot Ch Inputs To display the state of the binary input signals from opposite side
4 Prot Inputs To display the state of the protection binary inputs
5 Interlock Status To display the state of the interlocking signals for remote control
The submenu “Outputs” has following submenus.

1 Contact Outputs To display the state of the general binary outputs
2 GOOSE Outputs To display the state of the GOOSE binary outputs
The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus.

1 Prot Superv To display the state of the protection supervision alarm elements
2 GOOSE Superv To display the state of the GOOSE supervision alarm elements
8.2.4.1 View Status
Here takes viewing the status of the general binary inputs as an example to introduce the
operating steps of viewing the status.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Status” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Inputs” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Contact Inputs” and press key
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to view the expected binary inputs.
Contact Inputs
B07.BI_01 0
B07.BI_02 0
B07.BI_03 1
B07.BI_04 1
B07.BI_05 0
B07.BI_06 0
B07.BI_07 0
Figure 8.2-5 LCD display of the status of the general binary inputs

Date: 2015-12-01
The following tables show all the binary signal status of this relay.
 General binary input status

1 B07.BI_01 The status of the No.1 general binary input
15 … ……
The signal symbol of a binary input is “B0x.BI_yy”; “x” is the sequence number of the binary input
module location in the rack of this relay, and “yy” is the sequence number of the binary input at the
binary input module. For the details about the binary inputs, see Section 6.8.
 GOOSE binary input status

1 GBI_001 The status of the No.1 GOOSE binary input
2 GBI_002 The status of the No.2 GOOSE binary input
3 … ……
It is only an example in above table, and the GOOSE binary inputs in this relay which are
configured according to a practical engineering should be taken as final and binding.
 Binary input signal status form opposite side

1 FO.RecvTS1 The status of the No.1 received signal
5 87L.Sig_BlkDiff_Rmt The status of the differential protection blocking signal
6 87L.Sig_IntTrpA_Rmt The status of the inter-tripping signal of phase A
7 87L.Sig_IntTrpB_Rmt The status of the inter-tripping signal of phase B
8 87L.Sig_IntTrpC_Rmt The status of the inter-tripping signal of phase C
9 87L.Sig_PermA_Rmt The status of the differential protection permission signal of phase A

Date: 2015-12-01
10 87L.Sig_PermB_Rmt The status of the differential protection permission signal of phase B

11 87L.Sig_PermC_Rmt The status of the differential protection permission signal of phase C
 Protection binary input status

1 BI_52b The binary input of the state of the CB normally closed contact signal
2 BI_52a The binary input of the state of the CB normally opened contact signal
3 Ctrl.Sig_EnCtrl The binary input of the enabling remote control function signal
4 Ctrl.Sig_Unblock The binary input of the interlock unlocking function s ignal
5 BI_LowPres_Trp The binary input of the tripping low pressure signal
6 BI_LowPres_Cls The binary input of the closing low pressure signal
7 BI_TrigDFR The binary input of the triggering oscillography signal
8 BI_RstTarg The binary input of the signal resetting signal
9 FO.RecvTS1 The status of the No.1 received signal from opposite side
13 FO.SendTS1 The status of the No.1 remote transmission signal
 Interlock input status

1 Interlock1.Sig_Opn The interlock check status of the No.1 manual tripping element
2 Interlock1.Sig_Cls The interlock check status of the No.1 manual closing element
 General binary output status

1 B09.BO_01 The status of the binary output “B09.BO_01”

Date: 2015-12-01
7 … ……
10 … ……
The signal symbol of a binary output is “B0x.BO_yy”; “x” is the sequence number of the binary
output module location in the rack of this relay, and “yy” is the sequence number of the binary
output at the binary output module. For the details about the binary outputs, see Section 6.4 and
Section 6.7.
 GOOSE binary output status

1 GBO_01 The status of the No.1 GOOSE general output
2 GBO_02 The status of the No.2 GOOSE general output
3 … ……
It is only an example in above table, and the GOOSE binary outputs in this relay which are
 Supervision alarm element status

1 Fail_Device The status of the alarm signal “Fail_Device”
2 Fail_BoardConfig The status of the alarm signal “Fail_BoardConfig”
3 Fail_Setting The status of the alarm signal “Fail_Setting”
4 Fail_Setting_OvRange The status of the alarm signal “Fail_Setting_OvRange”
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd The status of the alarm signal “Fail_SettingItem_Chgd”
6 Alm_Device The status of the alarm signal “Alm_Device”
7 Alm_Setting_MON The status of the alarm signal “Alm_Setting_MON”
8 Alm_Version The status of the alarm signal “Alm_Version”
9 Alm_CommTest The status of the alarm signal “Alm_CommTest”
10 Alm_TimeSyn The status of the alarm signal “Alm_TimeSyn”
11 Alm_Maintenance The status of the alarm signal “Alm_Maintenance”
12 Alm_Sample The status of the alarm signal “Alm_Sample”
13 Alm_52b The status of the alarm signal “Alm_52b”
14 VTS.Alm_SynVT The status of the alarm signal “VTS.Alm_SynVT”
15 VTS.Alm The status of the alarm signal “VTS.Alm”
16 CTS.Alm The status of the alarm signal “CTS.Alm”
17 49.Alm The status of the alarm signal “49.Alm”
18 Alm_LowPres_Trp The status of the alarm signal “Alm_LowPres_Trp”
19 Alm_LowPres_Cls The status of the alarm signal “Alm_LowPres_Cls”
20 FO.Alm The status of the alarm signal “FO.Alm”
21 FO.Alm_ID The status of the alarm signal “FO.Alm_ID”
22 87L.Alm_Diff The status of the alarm signal “87L.Alm_Diff”
23 Alm_SpareX The status of the alarm signal “Alm_SpareX” (X: a number; 01, 02 etc.)

Date: 2015-12-01
For the details about the supervision alarm element, see Section 4.2.
 GOOSE alarm element status

1 GAlm_AStorm_PL The status of the alarm signal “GAlm_AStorm_PL”
2 GAlm_BStorm_PL The status of the alarm signal “GAlm_BStorm_PL”
3 GAlm_CfgFile_PL The status of the alarm signal “GAlm_CfgFile_PL”
4 GAlm_ADisc_PL_01 The status of the alarm signal “GAlm_ADisc_PL_01”
5 GAlm_BDisc_PL_01 The status of the alarm signal “GAlm_BDisc_PL_01”
6 … ……
It is only an example in above table, and the GOOSE alarm elements in this relay which are
8.2.5 Submenu of “Records”
Purpose:
This menu is used to view all kinds of history records, such as the protection tripping reports, the
supervision alarm records and the binary state change records etc.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Records” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the
main menu of this device.
The submenu “Records” has following submenus.

1 Disturb Records To display the fault reports
2 Superv Events To display the supervision alarm records
3 IO Events To display the records of binary state change records
4 Device Logs To display the device operation reports
5 Control Logs To display the local/remote control records
NOTICE!
Press the key “+”, “-”, “+”, “-” and “ENT” in sequence to enter the submenu for clearing
the history reports.
8.2.5.1 View History Fault Report
The history fault report stores the trip elements, trip time and waveform of a selected trip report.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Records” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.

Date: 2015-12-01
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Disturb Records” and press key
“ENT” to enter this submenu. If there is no report in the selected submenu, it will show “No
Report!” on the LCD.
4. Press key “+” or “-” to view the expected history fault report.
Disturb Records NO.4

2011-02-08 11:18:18:988ms
0000ms FD.Pkp
0105ms 50/51P1.Op
Ipmax 03.040A
3I0_Calmax 01.011A
fmax 50.030Hz
fmin 49.990Hz
Figure 8.2-6 History fault report on LCD
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history trip report, and the
second line shows the operation time of the history trip report. Other lines show the protection
elements and fault information one by one according to the relative time sequence. The fault
information includes fault phase, maximum fault value and minimum fault value. For more
information about the protection elements and fault information, see Section 8.3.1.
8.2.5.2 View History Alarm Report
The history alarm report stores the alarm elements and alarm time.
Operating steps:
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Superv Events” and press key
“ENT” to enter this submenu. If there is no report in the selected submenu, it will show “No
Report!” on the LCD.
4. Press key “+” or “-” to view the expected history alarm report.
Superv Events NO.18

2011-02-08 18:18:18:988ms
Alm_Device 0->1
VTS.Alm 0->1
Figure 8.2-7 History alarm report on LCD
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history alarm report, and the

Date: 2015-12-01
second line shows the alarm time of the history alarm report. Other lines show the alarm elements
and state change information one by one. For more information about the alarm elements, see
Section 8.3.2.
8.2.5.3 View History Binary State Change Report
The history binary state change report stores the binary signal name and state change time.
Operating steps:
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “IO Events” and press key “ENT”
to enter this submenu. If there is no report in the selected submenu, it will show “No Report!”
on the LCD.
4. Press key “+” or “-” to view the expected history binary state change report.
IO Events NO.98
2011-02-08 15:18:48:198ms
FD.Pkp 0->1
Figure 8.2-8 History binary state change report on LCD
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history binary input state
change report, and the second line shows the binary state change time of the history binary state
change report. Other lines show the binary state change information one by one. For more
information about the binary signals, see Section 8.2.4.
8.2.5.4 View History User Operation Report
The history user operation report stores the user operation information and user operation time.
Operating steps:
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Device Logs” and press key
4. Press key “+” or “-” to view the expected history user operation report.

Date: 2015-12-01
Device Logs NO.6

2011-02-08 08:21:33:986ms
master_setting_modified
Figure 8.2-9 History user operation report on LCD
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history user operation report,
and the second line shows the user operation time of the history user operation report. Other lines
show the user operation information.
8.2.5.5 View History Control Report
The history control report stores the control information and control time.
Operating steps:
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Control Logs” and press key
4. Press key “+” or “-” to view the expected history control report.
Control Logs NO.2

2011-02-08 17:58:29:818ms
CtrlObj Ctrl1
CtrlFrom Local HMI
CtrlLocat Local Control
Condition NoCheck
InterLock No
CtrlCmd Execute/Open
Figure 8.2-10 Histor y control report on LCD
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history control report, and the
second line shows the control time of the control report. Other lines show the control information.
8.2.6 Submenu of “Settings”
Purpose:
The menu is used to view and modify the settings and parameters of this device. Please read
Chapter 7 for the details about all the settings.
Access approach:

Date: 2015-12-01
Move cursor to the item “Settings” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the
The submenu “Settings” has following submenus.

1 System Settings To view and modify the system settings
2 Prot Settings To view and modify the protection settings
3 BCU Settings To view and modify the monitor and control settings
4 Logic Links To view and modify the virtual enabling binary input settings
5 Device Setup To view and modify the device and communication settings
The submenu “Prot Settings” has following submenus.

1 Diff Settings To view and modify the s etting of the differential protection
2 OC Settings To view and modify the settings of the OC protection
3 NegOC Settings To view and modify the settings of the NOC protection
4 EF Settings To view and modify the settings of the ROC protection
5 SEF Settings To view and modify the settings of the SEF protection
6 BFP Settings To view and modify the settings of the BFP protection
7 BrknCond Settings To view and modify the settings of the BCP protection
8 SOTF Settings To view and modify the settings of the SOTF protection
9 ThOvLd Settings To view and modify the settings of the thermal overload protection
10 VoltProt Settings To view and modify the settings of the voltage protection
11 AR Settings To view and modify the settings of the auto-recloser
12 MR Prot Settings To view and modify the settings of the mechanical protection
13 Superv Settings To view and modify the settings of the supervision function
14 CfgBO Settings To view and modify the settings of the binary outputs
15 Copy Settings To copy a group of setting to other group
The submenu “BCU Settings” has following submenus.

1 Control Settings To view and modify the settings of the CB control function
2 Interlock Settings To view and modify the settings of the interlock function
3 AC Calbr Settings This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
The submenu “Logic Links” has following submenus.

1 Function Links To view and modify the function link settings
2 GOOSE_Recv_Links To view and modify the GOOSE reception link settings
3 Spare Links To view and modify the spare link settings
The submenu “Device Setup” has following submenus.

Date: 2015-12-01

1 Device Settings To view and modify the device related settings
2 Comm Settings To view and modify the communication settings
8.2.6.1 View Settings
Here takes viewing the overcurrent protection settings as an example to introduce the operating
steps of viewing the setting.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Settings” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Prot Settings” and press key
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “OC Settings” and press key
“ENT” to enter the selecting interface of the setting group number.
5. Press key “+” or “-” to select the expected setting group number and then press key “ENT” to
show the settings of the selected group.
6. Press key “▲” or “▼” to view the expected protection settings.
The selecting interface of the setting group number is shown as below.
OC Settings
Please Select Group for
Active Group: 01
Selected Group: 01
Figure 8.2-11 LCD display of the selection of setting group number
The setting interface of the selected setting group is shown as below.
OC Settings
50/51P.U2_VCE 8.000 V
50/51P.Upp_VCE 70.000 V
50/51P.RCA -45 deg
50/51P.En_VTS_Blk 0
50/51P.K_Hm2 0.200
50/51P.I_Rls_ ... 30.000 A
50/51P.Opt_Hm_Blk 1
Figure 8.2-12 LCD displa y of the selected protection settings

Date: 2015-12-01
8.2.6.2 Modify the Settings
The settings can be modified through the local HMI to meet the dema nd of practical engineering.
Operating steps:
1. Refer the Section 8.2.6.1 to locate the cursor on the expected setting, and then press key
“ENT” to enter the setting modification state.
2. Press key “+” or “-” to modify a selected setting, and press key “ENT” to return to the setting
interface (see Figure 8.2-12) after the selected setting modification is finished.
3. Repeat Step “1” and “2” to modify other settings which need to be modified.
4. After finishing the setting modification, press key “ESC” to prompt the user whether to save
the settings. Select “Yes” to confirm to save the modified settings. Then the password input
interface is shown on the LCD. Input the correct password and press key “ENT” to confirm the
modification. If the modification is given up, press key “ESC” to exit the modification operation.
5. After confirming the setting modification, it will show “Saving Settings…” on the LCD. Then the
device will restart, and the new settings will be in service.
NOTICE!
It is necessary to certify whether the modified settings are correct absolutely before
confirming the setting modification.
8.2.6.3 Copy the Settings
The last submenu “Copy Settings” is used to copy the active settings to another group.
Operating steps:
enter this submenu.
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Copy Settings” and press key
“ENT” to enter the interface for copying settings.
show the password input interface.
6. Input the correct password and then press key “ENT” to copy the settings of the active group
to the selected group.
8.2.6.4 Switch the Active Setting Group
There are two methods which are used to switch one setting group to another group. One method
is to modify the setting [Active_Grp] in submenu “System Settings”. Another method is detailed

Date: 2015-12-01
as following operating steps.
Operating steps:
1. Press key “GRP” to enter the setting group switch interface in the default displaying situation.
3. Input the correct password and then press key “ENT” to copy the settings of the active group
to the selected group.
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change to Group: 02
Figure 8.2-13 LCD displa y of the change of active group
8.2.7 Submenu of “Print”
Purpose:
The menu is used to print the relevant information of this device. A printer is needed, and the
EPSON® LQ-300K is recommended.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Print” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the main
The submenu “Print” has following submenus.

1 Device Info To print the device description information
2 Settings To print the settings of this device
3 Disturb Records To print the fault reports
4 Superv Events To print the supervision alarm records
5 IO Events To print the records of binary state change records
6 Device Status To print the status of this device
7 Waveforms To print the fault and disturbance records
8 IEC103 Info To print the IEC60870-5-103 information of this device
9 Cancel Print To cancel the printing operation
The submenu “Settings” maybe has following submenus.

1 System Settings To print the system settings

Date: 2015-12-01
2 Prot Settings To print the protection settings

3 BCU Settings To print the monitor and control settings
4 Logic Links To print the virtual enabling binary input settings
5 Device Setup To print the device and communication settings
6 All Settings To print all the settings of this device
7 Latest Chgd Settings To print the latest modified settings
8.2.7.1 Print a Selected Item
Here takes printing the overcurrent protection settings as an example to introduce the operating
steps of print a selected item.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Print” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
enter this submenu.
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “OC Settings” and press key
“ENT” to enter the selecting interface of the setting group number.
print the settings of the selected group.
8.2.7.2 Cancel Printing Operation
The submenu “Cancel Print” is used to cancel the present printing content.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Print” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Cancel Print” and press key
“ENT” to cancel the present printing content. The information “Canceling Print…” is shown on
the LCD.
8.2.8 Submenu of “Local Cmd”
Purpose:
This menu is used to operate this device locally, such as signal resetting, triggering an
oscillograph, controlling circuit breaker, clearing history statistic counter etc.

Date: 2015-12-01
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Local Cmd” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the
The submenu “Local Cmd” maybe has following submenus.

1 Reset Target To restore all the signals on the LCD and binary outputs
2 Trig Oscillograph To record present measurements as oscillogram
3 Download To enable the download function of this relay
4 Clear Counter To clear the statistic information
5 Clear Interlock File To delete the interlock configuration file of this relay
6 Clear Energy Counter To clear the energy accumulation counter of this relay
7 Control To control the circuit breaker
8.2.8.1 Reset Signals and Outputs
The submenu “Reset Target” is used to reset the signals and outputs.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Local Cmd” and press key “ENT”
to enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Reset Target” and press key
“ENT” to restore all the signals and relevant outputs of this relay.
8.2.8.2 Trigger an Oscillogram
The submenu “Trig Oscillogram” is used to trigger this relay to store a waveform.
Operating steps:
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Trig Oscillogram” and press key
“ENT” to trigger an oscillogram.
8.2.8.3 Clear Statistic Counter
The submenu “Clear Counter” is used to clear the statistic information (optical channel
communication statistic information etc.).
Operating steps:

Date: 2015-12-01
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Clear Counter” and press key
“ENT” to clear the statistic information. The information “Clear Statistic Data…” is shown on
the LCD.
The operation steps of the submenu “Clear Interlock File” and “Clear Energy Counter” are
similar with the operation steps of the submenu “Clear Counter”.
8.2.8.4 Control CB through Local HMI
The submenu “Control” is used to control the circuit breaker through the local HMI of this relay.
There are 5 groups of control elements in this relay. Anyone of them can be used to control
(tripping or closing) a circuit breaker or a disconnector.
Operating steps:
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Control” and press key “ENT” to
4. Input correct password and then press key “ENT” to show the control item selection interface.
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to select an expected control element and then press key “ENT” to show
the password input interface.
6. Press key “+”, “-”, “◄” and “►” to enter the correct password and then enter the control object
selection interface, and then press key “▲” or “▼” to select a control object.
7. Press key “ENT” to enter control command selection interface, and then press key “▲” or “▼”
to select a control command.
8. Press key “ENT” to enter control check condition selection interface, and then press key “▲”
or “▼” to select a control check condition.
9. Press key “ENT” to enter control interlock selection interface, and then press key “▲” or “▼”
to select a control interlock condition.
10. Press key “ENT” to enter control type selection interface, and then press key “▲” or “▼” to
select a control type.
11. Press key “ENT” to confirm the current control operation. The information about the result of
the current control operation will be shown on the LCD.
The interfaces related to the control are shown as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
Control Ctrl1
Select Control Object Select Control Command
Ctrl1 Open(Lower)
Ctrl2 Close(Raise)
Ctrl3 (Stop)
Ctrl4
Ctrl5
Figure 8.2-14 Control object and command selection interfaces
Ctrl1 Ctrl1
Select Execution Condition Select Interlock Condition
NoCheck InterlockChk
SynchroCheck InterlockNotChk
DeadCheck
LoopCheck
EF Line Selection
Figure 8.2-15 Control execution check and interlock selection interfaces
Ctrl1 Ctrl1
Select Control Type Result:
Select
Execute
Cancel Operation Success
Figure 8.2-16 Control type selection interface and execution result interface
All the items about the control function are listed as below.
Select the control group number

Ctrl1 The No.1 remote control output
Select the control operation
open(Lower) Open a circuit breaker or disconnector
close(Raise) Close a circuit breaker or disconnector
(stop) Stop current operation, not supported in this relay.
Select the control check mode
NoCheck Select the non-check mode
SynchroCheck Select the synchronism check mode, not supported in this relay.
DeadCheck Select the dead check mode, not supported in this relay.
LoopCheck Select the loop check mode, not supported in this relay.
EF Line Selection Select the grounding trip check mode, not supported in this relay.
Select the control interlock mode

Date: 2015-12-01
InterlockChk Select the interlock check mode

InterlockNotChk Select the non-interlock check mode
Select the control type
Select control selection
Execute control execution
Cancel control cancellation
8.2.9 Submenu of “Information”
Purpose:
This menu is used to view program version information and module information of this relay.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Information” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the
The submenu “Information” maybe has following submenus.

1 Version Info To view the program version information of this relay
2 Board Info To view the module information of this relay
8.2.9.1 View Software Version
The program version information of this relay can be known through this menu.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Information” and press key “ENT”
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Version Info” and press key
“ENT” to show the program version information.
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to show the version information of the program.
The software version information interface is shown as below.
Version Info
NR
Differential Relay
PCS-9613
Version 3.00
Program CRC F94D89D1
Program Time 2015-11-21
15:59:27
Figure 8.2-17 LCD displa y of the software version

Date: 2015-12-01
The first line shows the title of this interface, other lines show the information of the board
information, including the manufacturer abbreviation name, the device name, the device code, the
program version, the program CRC code and the program creation time.
NOTICE!
It is only an example for explaining the software version menu. The practical software
version of this relay should be taken as final and binding.
8.2.9.2 View Board Information
All the module information can be known through this menu.
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Information” and press key “ENT”
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Board Info” and press key “ENT”
to show the board information.
The board information interface is shown as below.
Board Info
NO Type Stat Conf
01 NR4106 √ √
03 NR4202 √ (√)
06 NR4521 √ (√)
07 NR4503 √ (√)
Figure 8.2-18 LCD displa y of the board information
The first line shows the title of this interface, other lines show the information of the board
information, including the slot sequence number, the module type, the module operation state and
the module configuration state. In normal operation situation, the module configuration state
should be same with the module operation state.
8.2.10 Submenu of “Test”
Purpose:
This menu is used to test particular functions of the device, such as testing binary signals, testing
binary outputs and testing telemetering etc. It can provide convenience for the communication test
and the operation electrical circuit.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Test” and press key “ENT” to enter its submenu after entering the main

Date: 2015-12-01
The submenu “Test” maybe has following submenus.

1 Prot Ch Counter To view the status of the selected FO channel
2 CB Counter To counter the circuit breaker operation (open or close) number
3 Device Test To test the binary signals, binary outputs and telemetering etc.
4 Internal Signal This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
5 AC Auto Calbr This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
6 Disturb Item This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
7 CptRuntime This submenu is only reserved for the manufacturer
8 SetLCD To test the LCD and the user defined LED indicators
The submenu “Prot Ch Counter” has following submenus.

1 Ch1 Counter To view the status of the No.1 FO channel
The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus.

1 Disturb Elements To test the protective element operation signals
2 Superv Events To test the supervision alarm signals
3 IO Events To test the binary state change signals
4 Measurements To test the metering measurements
5 Contact Outputs To test the binary outputs, please disconnect the external circuit
The submenu “Disturb Elements”, “Superv Events” and “IO Events” have following submenus.

1 All Test To test all the binary signals
2 Select Test To test the selected binary signal
8.2.10.1 Communication Test of the Binary Signal
The binary signals include the protective element operation signals, supervision alarm signals and
binary state change signals.
Here takes test the protective element operation signal as an example to introduce the operating
steps of communication test of the binary signals.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Test” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Device Test” and press key “ENT”
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Disturb Elements” and press key

Date: 2015-12-01
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Select Test” and press key “ENT”
to show all the protective elements.
6. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on a selected protective element and then press key
“ENT” to create a binary signal.
NOTICE!
The submenu “All Test” is used to test all the binary signals automatically.
8.2.10.2 Communication Test of the Telemetering
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Test” and press key “ENT” to
enter this submenu.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Device Test” and press key “ENT”
4. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Measurements” and press key
“ENT” to all the metering measurements.
5. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on a selected metering measurements and press
key “+” or “-” to modify the selected metering value.
6. After finishing the modification, press key “ENT” to transmit the metering values.
8.2.11 Submenu of “Clock”
Purpose:
This menu is used to modify the current time of this relay.
Access approach:
Move cursor to the item “Clock” and press key “ENT” to enter the clock modification interface after
entering the main menu of this device.
8.2.11.1 Clock Modification
Set the current time of this relay as following steps.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Clock” and press key “ENT” to
enter the clock modification interface.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on a selected item and press key “+” or “-” to modify
the selected item.

Date: 2015-12-01
4. After finishing the clock modification, press key “ENT” to confirm the modification.
The clock modification interface is shown as below.
Clock
Year: 2011
Month: 01
Day: 23
Hour: 18
Minute: 28
Second: 58
Figure 8.2-19 Clock modification interface
8.2.12 Submenu of “Language”
Purpose:
This menu is used to modify the display language of this relay.
8.2.12.1 Language Modification
Modify the display language as following steps.
Operating steps:
2. Press key “▲” or “▼” to locate the cursor on the submenu “Language” and press key “ENT”
to enter the language modification interface.
3. Press key “▲” or “▼” to select the expected display language.
4. After finishing the language modification, press key “ENT” to confirm the modification.
The language modification interface is shown as below.
Please Select Language:
1. Chinese
2. English
Figure 8.2-20 Language modification interface
8.3 Understand the LCD Display
8.3.1 Display When Tripping

If there is any protection element operating, a brief tripping report will appear on the LCD, and the

Date: 2015-12-01
backlight of the LCD and the LED “TRIP” will be on simultaneously.
The format of the fault report is shown as below.
Trip NO.4
2011-02-08 11:18:18:988ms
0000ms FD.Pkp
0105ms 50/51P1.Op
Ipmax 03.040A
3I0_Calmax 01.011A
fmax 50.030Hz
fmin 49.990Hz
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of trip report
The first line shows the report title and the sequence number of the history trip report, and the
second line shows the operation time of the history trip report. Other lines show the protection
elements and fault information one by one according to the relative time sequence. The fault
information includes fault phase, maximum fault value and minimum fault value.
NOTICE!
In case more than one protection element has operated, the relevant report will be
displayed alternatively one by one according to time sequence on the LCD. And the
fault information is listed after all the protection elements.
The trip report will keep being displayed on LCD until an acknowledgement is received by pressing
the key “ENT”+“ESC”, by energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg] or by executing the submenu
“Reset Target”. The default display then appears on LCD and LED “TRIP” is turned off.
Protection elements listed below may be displayed.
No. Protection Element Description

1 FD.Pkp The fault detector operates.
2 Op_Prot Anyone of the protective elements in this relay operates.
3 87L.Op_Biased1 The stage 1 current differential protection operates.
5 50/51P1.St The stage 1 overcurrent protection picks up.
6 50/51P1.Op The stage 1 overcurrent protection operates.

Date: 2015-12-01
17 50/51G1.St The stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection picks up.

18 50/51G1.Op The stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection operates.
29 50/51Q1.St The stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection picks up.
30 50/51Q1.Op The stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection operates.
33 50/51SEF1.St The stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection picks up.
34 50/51SEF1.Op The stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection operates.
41 49.St The thermal overload protection picks up.
42 49.Op The thermal overload protection operates.
43 50PSOTF.St The SOTF overcurrent protection picks up.
44 50PSOTF.Op The SOTF overcurrent protection operates.
45 50GSOTF.St The zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection picks up.
46 50GSOTF.Op The zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection operates.
47 50BC.St The broken conductor protection picks up.
48 50BC.Op The broken conductor protection operates.
49 50BF.St The breaker failure protection picks up.
50 50BF.Op The breaker failure protection operates.
51 50BF.ReTrp The breaker failure protection re-trip operates.
52 27P1.St The stage 1 undervoltage protection picks up.
53 27P1.Op The stage 1 undervoltage protection operates.
56 59P1.St The stage 1 overvoltage protection picks up.
57 59P1.Op The stage 1 overvoltage protection operates.

Date: 2015-12-01
60 79.InProg The auto-recloser picks up.

st
61 79.Close_3PS1 The 1 shot auto-recloser operates.
62 79.Close_3PS2 The 2 nd shot auto-recloser operates.
63 79.Close_3PS3 The 3 rd shot auto-recloser operates.
64 79.Close_3PS4 The 4 th shot auto-recloser operates.
65 MR1.St The No.1 mechanical protection picks up.
66 MR1.Op The No.1 mechanical protection operates.
Fault information listed below may be displayed.
No. Fault Information Description

1 Id_Max The maximum phase differential current
2 Faulty_Ia The fault current of phase A
3 Faulty_Ib The fault current of phase B
4 Faulty_Ic The fault current of phase C
5 Faulty_3I0_Cal The self-calculated zero sequence fault current
6 Faulty_3I0_Ext1 The external zero sequence fault current
7 Faulty_I2 The negative sequence fault current
8 Faulty_Ua The fault voltage of phase A
9 Faulty_Ub The fault voltage of phase B
10 Faulty_Uc The fault voltage of phase C
11 Faulty_3U0_Cal The self-calculated zero sequence fault voltage
See Chapter 3 for more details about the protection operation theory.
8.3.2 Display under Abnormal Condition
8.3.2.1 Alarm Information on LCD
If there is any abnormality in the operation or any firmware error is detected by the self-diagnostics
of this relay, an alarm report will be displayed instantaneously on the LCD. Therefore, the default
display will be replaced by the alarm report. The format of the alarm report is shown as below.
Alarm Infor
Alm_Device
VTS.Alm
Figure 8.3-2 Information of alarm report on the LCD

Date: 2015-12-01
The first line shows the alarm report title, and then shows the alarm elements one by one
according to the time sequence.
The alarm report will keep being displayed on LCD until the relevant alarm situation is restored to
normal state. It means that this relay does not detect any alarm situation. The default display then
appears on LCD and LED “ALARM ” is off. The LED “ALARM ” will not be on if either of the alarm
signals [Fail_Device] and [Fail_Setting] is issued.
Alarm elements listed below may be displayed. See Section 4.2 for more details about the alarm
element operation theory.
No. Alarm Element Description HEALTHY ALARM

1 Fail_Device A serious fault is detected to block this device. Off ×
2 Fail_BoardConfig The module configuration of this device is wrong. Off ×
3 Fail_Setting Anyone of the settings is modified. Off ×
4 Fail_Setting_OvRange An yone of the settings is out of range. Off ×
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd An yone of the setting items is changed. Off ×
6 Alm_Device An yone of the software supervision alarm occurs. × On
7 Alm_Setting_MON The settings from the HMI module are not correct. × On
8 Alm_Version The current program version is not correct. × On
9 Alm_CommTest The communication test operation is executed. × On
10 Alm_TimeSyn The time synchronization is not correct. × On
11 Alm_Maintenance The device is in maintenance situation. × On
The sampling values of the dual channel are
12 Alm_Sample × On
inconsistent.
13 Alm_52b The normally closed contact of the CB is abnormal. × On
14 VTS.Alm_SynVT The synchro-check VT circuit is failed. × On
15 VTS.Alm The protection voltage transformer circuit is failed. × On
16 CTS.Alm The current transformer is failed. × On
17 49.Alm The thermal overload situation occurs. × On
18 Alm_LowPres_Trp The pressure of the tripping circuit is low. × On
19 Alm_LowPres_Cls The pressure of the closing circuit is low. × On
20 FO.Alm The FO channel is abnormal. × On
21 FO.Alm_ID The identification code of received frame is wrong. × On
22 87L.Alm_Diff The differential current is abnormal. × On
23 Alm_SpareX The No.X reserved alarm signal is issued. × On
Here, “On” means the LED is on, “Off” means the LED is off, and “×” means having no influence.
NOTICE!
When this relay is energized, in the startup process, the LED “ HEALTHY” is off and the
LED “ALARM ” is on.
The handling suggestions of the alarm events are listed as below.

Date: 2015-12-01
No. Alarm Element Handing Suggestion

1 Fail_Device Please check whether there has a serious error in this relay.
2 Fail_BoardConfig Please check whether the board configuration complies with the software.
3 Fail_Setting Please ensure whether anyone of the settings is modified.
Please ensure whether anyone of the settings is out of range, and make the
4 Fail_Setting_OvRange
related settings be in the setting range.
Please enter the relevant setting menu of this relay and use the submenu
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd
“Confirm Settings” (under submenu “Settings”) to confirm it.
6 Alm_Device Please ensure whether anyone of the software supervision alarm occurs.
7 Alm_Setting_MON Please inform the manufacturer to deal with it.
8 Alm_Version Please inform the manufacturer to deal with it.
9 Alm_CommTest Please check whether this device is in communication test situation.
10 Alm_TimeSyn Please check whether the time synchronization signal is correct.
11 Alm_Maintenance Please check whether the binary input for denoting maintenance is energized.
12 Alm_Sample Please replace the main CPU board or inform the manufacturer to deal with it.
13 Alm_52b Please check the auxiliary open position contact of the circuit breaker.
14 VTS.Alm_SynVT Please check the secondary circuit of the synchro-check voltage transformer.
15 VTS.Alm Please check the secondary circuit of the protection voltage transformer.
16 CTS.Alm Please check the secondary circuit of the current transformer.
17 49.Alm Please check whether the thermal overload condition is satisfied.
18 Alm_LowPres_Trp Please check the mechanism of the circuit breaker.
19 Alm_LowPres_Cls Please check the mechanism of the circuit breaker.
20 FO.Alm Please check the FO channel connection and relevant settings.
21 FO.Alm_ID Please check the identification code setting in this device.
22 87L.Alm_Diff Please check the phase differential currents of this device.
23 Alm_SpareX Please check whether the relevant alarm issuing conditions are satisfied.
8.3.2.2 Understand the Alarms
Hardware circuit and operation condition of this device are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corr esponding alarm
will be issued.
A common abnormality may block a certain number of protection functions while other functions
can still work.
However, if a serious hardware failure or abnormality is detected, all protection functions will be
blocked and the LED “HEALTHY” will be off.
When hardware failure is detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the corresponding
alarm signal will be issued. This relay can not work normally in such a situation and a manual
maintenance is required to fix the failure.
NOTICE!
If this device is blocked or alarm signal is issued during operation, do please find out its
reason by help of the history reports. If the reason can not be found on site, please

Date: 2015-12-01
inform the manufacturer NR Electric Co., Ltd.
8.4 Password Protection
For the safety purpose, this device provides password security function for modifying the settings
and doing a control operation. Only the input password is correct, the relevant operation can be
done. If the input password is correct, the relevant operation can be done; otherwise, it will show
the input interface on the LCD to prompt the user to input the password again.
The password for control operation is fixed, and it is “111”; and the password for modifying the
device settings, and it is “114”. The following figure shows the password input interface for control
operation.
Password:
000
Figure 8.4-1 Password input interface for control operation and setting modification
The password for modifying settings (except the device settings) is fixed, and it is press key “+”,
“◄”, “▲” and “-” in sequence. The following figure shows the password input interface for
modifying settings.
Password:
----
Figure 8.4-2 Password input interface for modifying settings

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
Table of Contents
9.1 General Description ....................................................................................................9-1

9.2 Introduction of PCS-Explorer Software .................................................................9-1
9.3 Configurable Information ..........................................................................................9-2

9.3.1 Configurable Input Signals ............................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.2 Configurable Output Signals ............................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.3 Configurable LED Indicators ............................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.4 Configurable Binary Inputs ............................................................................................. 9-10
9.3.5 Configurable Binary Outputs .......................................................................................... 9-10

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
9.1 General Description
The configurable function of this relay can be easy to realize the system configuration, the
protection function configuration, the binary input configuration, the binary output configuration,
the LED indicator configuration and the logic programming function in this relay through the
PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software, which makes this relay can meet different
practical requirements.
9.2 Introduction of PCS-Explorer Software
The PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of the
UAPC platform device, such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects
substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one
substation to govern many devices.
The software provides two kinds of operation modes: on-line mode and off-line mode. The on-line
mode supports the Ethernet connection with the device through the standard IEC60870-5-103 and
can be capable of uploading and downloading the configuration files through Ethernet net; the
off-line mode supports the off-line setting configuration.
In addition, it also supports programmable logic to meet the demands of a practical engineering.
Please see the PCS-Explorer online help brochure or the instruction manual of PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software for more details about the PCS-Explorer software.
The functions of the PCS-Explorer software:
 Programmable logic (off-line function)
 System configuration (off-line function)
 Function configuration (off-line function)
 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
 Binary signals configuration (off-line function)
 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
For more details about how to do a logic graph configuration, see the PCS-Explorer online help
brochure or the instruction manual of PCS-Explorer configuration tool auxiliary software.

Date: 2015-12-01
9.3 Configurable Information
9.3.1 Configurable Input Signals
All the configurable input signals of this relay are listed in following table.
No. Input Signal Description Default

The binary input of the auxiliary normally closed contact of the circuit
1 BI_52b B07.BI_08
breaker
The binary input of the auxiliary normally opened contact of the circuit
2 BI_52a B07.BI_09
breaker
The binary signal for inputting the state of the VT’s miniature circuit
3 Sig_MCB_VTS
breaker
4 Ctrl.In_EnCtrl The binary signal for enabling the remote control function B07.BI_03
5 Ctrl.In_Unblock The binary signal for unlocking the interlock control function
6 Ctrl1.In_ManOpn The binary input for inputting the manual tripping signal
7 Ctrl1.In_ManCls The binary input for inputting the manual closing signal
8 Ctrl1.In_ManSynChk The binary signal for enabling synchronism check of manual closing
9 Ctrl1.In_ManDdChk The binary signal for enabling dead check of manual closing
10 BI_LowPres_Trp The binary input of the tripping low pressure signal
11 BI_LowPres_Cls The binary input of the closing low pressure signal B07.BI_07
12 50BF.In_Init The initiation signal of the breaker failure protection
13 BI_RstTarg The binary input of the signal resetting signal B07.BI_04
14 Alm_Maintenance The device maintenance supervision signal B07.BI_06
15 BI_TrigDFR The binary input of the triggering oscillography signal
The binary signal for inputting the system on load state of the stage 1
16 27P1.OnLoad
The binary signal for inputting the system on load state of the stage 2
17 27P2.OnLoad
18 50/51P1.En1 The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 overcurrent protection
19 50/51P1.Blk The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 overcurrent protection
The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 negative sequence
30 50/51Q1.En1

Date: 2015-12-01
The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 negative sequence

31 50/51Q1.Blk
The binary signal for enabling the stage 2 negative sequence
32 50/51Q2.En1
The binary signal for blocking the stage 2 negative sequence
33 50/51Q2.Blk
The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent
34 50/51G1.En1
protection
The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent
35 50/51G1.Blk
protection
36 50/51G2.En1
protection
37 50/51G2.Blk
protection
38 50/51G3.En1
protection
39 50/51G3.Blk
protection
40 50/51G4.En1
protection
41 50/51G4.Blk
protection
42 50/51G5.En1
protection
43 50/51G5.Blk
protection
44 50/51G6.En1
protection
45 50/51G6.Blk
protection
The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 sensitive earth fault
46 50/51SEF1.En1
protection
The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 sensitive earth fault
47 50/51SEF1.Blk
protection
48 50/51SEF2.En1
protection
49 50/51SEF2.Blk
protection
50 50/51SEF3.En1
protection
51 50/51SEF3.Blk
protection
52 50/51SEF4.En1
protection

Date: 2015-12-01
53 50/51SEF4.Blk
protection
54 50BC.En1 The binary signal for enabling the broken conductor protection
55 50BC.Blk The binary signal for blocking the broken conductor protection
56 50PSOTF.En1 The binary signal for enabling the SOTF overcurrent protection
57 50PSOTF.Blk The binary signal for blocking the SOTF o vercurrent protection
The binary signal for enabling the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent
58 50GSOTF.En1
protection
The binary signal for blocking the zero sequence SOTF overcurrent
59 50GSOTF.Blk
protection
60 50BF.En1 The binary signal for enabling the breaker failure protection
61 50BF.Blk The binary signal for blocking the breaker failure protection
62 49.En1 The binary signal for enabling the thermal overload protection
63 49.Blk The binary signal for blocking the thermal overload protection
64 49.Clr The binary signal for clearing the heat of thermal overload protection
65 59P1.En1 The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 overvoltage protection
66 59P1.Blk The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 overvoltage protection
67 59P2.En1 The binary signal for enabling the stage 2 overvoltage protection
68 59P2.Blk The binary signal for blocking the stage 2 overvoltage protection
69 27P1.En1 The binary signal for enabling the stage 1 undervoltage protection
70 27P1.Blk The binary signal for blocking the stage 1 undervoltage protection
71 27P2.En1 The binary signal for enabling the stage 2 undervoltage protection
72 27P2.Blk The binary signal for blocking the stage 2 undervoltage protection
73 79.En1 The binary signal for enabling the auto-recloser
74 79.Blk The binary signal for blocking the auto-recloser
75 MR1.En1 The binary signal for enabling the No.1 mechanical protection
76 MR1.Blk The binary signal for blocking the No.1 mechanical protection
83 87L.En1 The binary signal for enabling the current differential protection
84 87L. Blk The binary signal for blocking the current differential protection
85 87L.In_TS1 The binary signal for inputting the No.1 remote transmission signal
89 Sig_Spare01 The No.1 programmable spare signal

Date: 2015-12-01

97 Alm_Spare01 The No.1 spare alarm signal
105 Switch1.in_52b The open status of the No.1 switch
106 Switch1.in_52a The close status of the No.1 switch
113 Interlock1.In_Opn The interlock check signal of the No.1 manual tripping element
114 Interlock1.In_Cls The interlock check signal of the No.1 manual closing element
123 BI_ChgSGin_sg1 The binary signal for switching to the No.1 setting group
9.3.2 Configurable Output Signals
All the configurable output signals of this relay are listed in following table.
No. Output Signal Description

1 FD.Pkp The fault detector operates.
4 FO.RecvTS1 The No.1 received signal from opposite side.

Date: 2015-12-01

8 FO.Alm The FO channel is abnormal.
9 87L.Alm_Diff The differential current is abnormal.
46 50BF.St The breaker failure protection picks up.
47 50BF.ReTrp The breaker failure protection re-trip operates.

Date: 2015-12-01
48 50BF.Op The breaker failure protection operates.

49 50BC.St The broken conductor protection picks up.
50 50BC.Op The broken conductor protection operates.
51 50PSOTF.St The SOTF overcurrent protection picks up.
52 50PSOTF.Op The SOTF overcurrent protection operates.
53 50GSOTF.St The zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection picks up.
54 50GSOTF.Op The zero sequence SOTF overcurrent protection operates.
55 49.St The thermal overload protection picks up.
56 49.Op The thermal overload protection operates.
65 79.InProg The auto-recloser picks up.
66 79.Close The auto-recloser operates.
67 79.Close_3PS1 The 1 st shot auto-recloser operates.
68 79.Close_3PS2 The 2 nd shot auto-recloser operates.
69 79.Close_3PS3 The 3 rd shot auto-recloser operates.
70 79.Close_3PS4 The 4 th shot auto-recloser operates.
71 79.Acti ve The auto-recloser is active.
72 79.Ready The auto-recloser is ready for operation.
73 79.Fail The operation of auto-recloser is failed.
74 79.Reset The auto-recloser is restored.

Date: 2015-12-01

99 Ctrl1.Opn The No.1 group of remote tripping output operates.
100 Ctrl1.Cls The No.1 group of remote closing output operates.
109 Alm_Device An yone of the software supervision alarm occurs.
110 Fail_Device A serious fault is detected to block this device.
111 Alm_52b The normally closed contact of the CB is abnormal.
112 VTS.Alm_SynVT The synchro-check voltage transformer circuit is failed.
113 VTS.Alm The protection voltage transformer circuit is failed.
114 CTS.Alm The current transformer is failed.
115 49.Alm The thermal overload situation occurs.
116 Alm_CommTest The communication test operation is executed.
117 Alm_TimeSyn The time synchronization is not correct.
118 Alm_Maintenance The binary input for denoting maintenance situation is energized.
119 Alm_LowPres_Trp The pressure of the tripping circuit is low.
120 Alm_LowPres_Cls The pressure of the closing circuit is low.
121 B07.BI_01 The No.1 binary input is energized.

Date: 2015-12-01

140 25M.Ok_SynChk The synchronism check of the manual closing function is satisfied.
141 25M.Ok_DdChk The dead check of the manual closing function is satisfied.
142 25A.Ok_SynChk The synchronism check of the auto-recloser is satisfied.
143 25A.Ok_DdChk The dead check of the auto-recloser is satisfied.
144 VTS.InstAlm The fast voltage transformer supervision is issued.
145 CTS.InstAlm The fast current transformer supervision is issued.
146 Prot.OnLoad The system on load condition is satisfied.
147 Breaker.Dpos The dual-position state of the circuit breaker.
148 Switch1.Dpos The dual-position state of the circuit breaker of the No.1 switch.
NOTICE!
The configurable output signals “Breaker.Dpos” and “Switchx.Dpos” (x: 1~4) are used
to indicate the state of the corresponding circuit breaker or switch. Each signal is a
four-state output state, and the state codes are listed as below.
State Code Description

0x00 Open state: “0” Close state: “0”
0xC0 Open state: “1” Close state: “1”
9.3.3 Configurable LED Indicators
All the configurable LED indicators of this relay are listed in following table.
No. LED Description Default

1 LED_01 The No.1 LED, it is not configurable. HEALTHY
2 LED_02 The No.2 LED, it is not configurable. AL ARM
3 LED_03 The No.3 LED, it is configurable. TRIP
4 LED_04 The No.4 LED, it is configurable. RECLOSE
5 LED_05 The No.5 LED, it is configurable. CB OPEN
6 LED_06 The No.6 LED, it is configurable. CB CLOSE
7 LED_07 The No.7 LED, it is configurable.

Date: 2015-12-01

9.3.4 Configurable Binary Inputs
All the configurable binary inputs of this relay are listed in following table.
No. Binary Input Description Default

1 B07.BI_01 The No.1 binary input, it is configurable.
3 B07.BI_03 The No.3 binary input, it is configurable. Ctrl.In_EnCtrl
4 B07.BI_04 The No.4 binary input, it is configurable. BI_RstTarg
5 B07.BI_05 The No.5 binary input, it is configurable. 79.Blk
6 B07.BI_06 The No.6 binary input, it is configurable. Alm_Maintenance
7 B07.BI_07 The No.7 binary input, it is configurable. BI_LowPres_Cls
8 B07.BI_08 The No.8 binary input, it is configurable. BI_52b
9 B07.BI_09 The No.9 binary input, it is configurable. BI_52a
9.3.5 Configurable Binary Outputs
All the configurable binary outputs of this relay are listed in following table.
No. Binary Output Description Default

1 B06.BO_07 The No.7 programmable binary output of the module NR4521C

Date: 2015-12-01
NOTICE!
Other configurable binary outputs which are not listed in above table only can be
configured through the setting [XXXX.OutMap] (“XXXX” is the abbreviation of a
protective element, such as 50/51P1, 50/51G1, 59P1 etc.) of each function element.
For more details about these settings, please see Chapter 7.

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10 Communication
Table of Contents
10.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ............................................................ 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ........................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.4 IEC61850 Communication ........................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.5 DNP3.0 Communication............................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.6 ModBus Communication .............................................................................................. 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface ...................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................ 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization .................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events .................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 Cyclic Measurements................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 General Commands ..................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.8 Generic Functions ........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.3.9 Disturbance Records ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4 IEC61850 Interface ................................................................................................. 10-7

10.4.1 Overview...................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.2 Communication Profiles ............................................................................................... 10-8
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................. 10-9
10.4.4 Server Data Organization........................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................ 10-15
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance .................................................................................................... 10-17

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.4.7 Logical Nodes ............................................................................................................ 10-21
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface ................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions.................................................................................................. 10-23
10.5.3 Transport Functions ................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions ....................................................................................... 10-24
10.6 ModBus Interface ................................................................................................. 10-31

10.6.1 Binary State Communication ...................................................................................... 10-32
10.6.2 Analog Data Communication...................................................................................... 10-32
10.6.3 Settings Communication ............................................................................................ 10-32
10.6.4 Remote Control.......................................................................................................... 10-32
10.6.5 Remote Regulation .................................................................................................... 10-32
10.6.6 Diagnostics Information.............................................................................................. 10-32
10.6.7 Download Settings ..................................................................................................... 10-33
10.6.8 Abnormal Information ................................................................................................. 10-33
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Format of IP and submask address .............................................................. 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication cable ..................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10.2-4 Ethernet communication structure ............................................................... 10-4
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ...................... 10-10
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance.................... 10-10
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances ..................10-11

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.1 General
This section outlines the remote data communication interfaces of th is relay. The relay can support
several protocols: IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850 and DNP3.0. Setting the relevant communication
parameter can select the expected protocol (see Section 7.6).
The EIA RS-485 standardized interfaces are isolated, as well as the Ethernet interfaces, and are
suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of
connection is that up to 32 relays can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair
electrical connection.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This relay provides some rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has two terminals in
the screw connector located on the back of the relay. This port has a common ground terminal for
the earth shield of the communication cable. See Section 6.5 for details of the connection
terminals. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data communication and they are intended for use
with a permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay’s “Comm Settings” submenu (see
Section 7.6). By using the keypad and LCD, configure the relevant communication protocol
parameters, the corresponding protocol and will be selected.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be noted that there is no agreed definition of
which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and the
communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (see Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slaver Slaver Slaver
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.
NOTICE!
It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the
bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR can not assume responsibility
for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of
incorrect application of this voltage.
Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This relay provides some rear Ethernet interfaces and they are unattached to each other. The
parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm Settings” (see
Section 7.6) except for the protocol which is a uniform parameter for these Ethernet ports.
10.2.2.1 IP Address and Network Communication Address
A brief explanation of IP and network submask is made as below. There are four sections for an IP
address.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Figure 10.2-2 Format of IP and submask address
Where:
 Section 1 and Section 2 can be set separately
 Section 3 × 256 + Section 4 = network communication address for IEC60087-5-103
The network communication address for IEC60087-5-103 has above relationship described as an
equation with section 3 and section 4 of the IP address.
10.2.2.2 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable as the communication cable.
A picture is shown below.
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication cable

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.2.2.3 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected to an exchanger via communication cable and thereby to form a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. The SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master statio n, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.
SCADA
Exchanger A
Exchanger B
PCS-96XX PCS-96XX PCS-96XX

Series Relay Series Relay
………………………… Series Relay
Figure 10.2-4 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protection equipment. The IEC60870-5-103 protocol is to use a twisted pair
EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. This relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station.
10.2.4 IEC61850 Communication

The IEC specification IEC61850: Communication Networks and Systems in Substations, a new
protocol defines the communication standards in substations. The standard configuration for the
IEC61850 protocol is based on the Ethernet.
10.2.5 DNP3.0 Communication

The DNP3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol) protocol can support the OSI/EPA model of the ISO
(International Organization for Standards), and it includes four parts: application layer protocol,
transport functions, data link layer protocol and data object library. The DNP3.0 protocol is
recommended to use the Ethernet network. This relay operates as a slave in the system,
responding to commands from a master station.
10.2.6 ModBus Communication

The ModBus protocol is a master/slaver communication protocol, and this device is severed as a
slaver. The detailed information about the ModBus protocol, see the “Modbus Protocol Reference
Guide (PI-MBUS-300 Rev.J)”.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with this relay as the slave device.
The relay conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: initialization (reset), time
synchronization, event record extraction, general interrogation, cyclic measurements, general
commands and disturbance records.
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

The EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this relay. The baudrate is
optional: 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 57600bps or 115200bps.
The unattached Ethernet ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this relay. The transmission
speed is 100Mbit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been
changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The relay will respond to
either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU
will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the COT
(Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the
nature of the reset command.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also
produce a power up event.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization
The time and date of this relay can be set by using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in
IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message, then
the relay will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time synchronization message is sent as a
send confirmation or a broadcast (send without any reply) message, a time synchronization Class
1 event will be generated.
If the clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to set clock by using
the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via the interface will cause th is relay to
create an event with the current date and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

The spontaneous events are categorized using the following information: type identification (TYP),

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
function type (FUN) and information number (INF). This relay can support ASDU 1, ASDU 2,
ASDU 40 and ASDU 41, the cause of transmission (COT) is “1”.
 ASDU 1, time-tagged message: alarm messages, special purpose binary input state change
messages.
 ASDU 2, time-tagged message with relative time: tripping messages and fault detector pickup
messages.
 ASDU 40, single point information: general binary input state change messages.
 ASDU 41, single point information with time-tagged: sequence of event (SOE) messages.
10.3.5 General Interrogation
The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.
The relay will respond to this GI command with an ASDU 44 message, the cause of tr ansmission
(COT) of this response is 9.
Referring the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 Cyclic Measurements

The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 50 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from
the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 and ASDU 9 are not used).
The cause of transmission is 2. The rate at which the relay produces new measured values is fixed
(about one second). It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent a s a
proportion of corresponding times the rated value of the analog value.
10.3.7 General Commands

A list of the supported commands (in control direction) is contained in the following table. The relay
will not respond to other commands, and short-term communication interruption will occur.
TYP FUN INF DCC Function

ASDU 64 1 48 0x81 Remote trip with selection
ASDU 64 1 48 0x82 Remote close with selection
ASDU 64 1 48 0x01 Remote trip with execution
ASDU 64 1 48 0x02 Remote close with execution
ASDU 64 1 48 0xC1 Remote trip with abortion
ASDU 64 1 48 0xC2 Remote close with abortion
If the relay receives one of the command messages correctly, it will respond with an ACK message,
and then send a message which has the same ASDU data with the control direction me ssage in
the next communication turn.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.3.8 Generic Functions
The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of th is relay,
and modify the setting.
Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more details abo ut generic
functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
 Generic functions in control direction
INF Semantics
240 Read headings of all defined groups
241 Read values or attributes of all entries in one group
243 Read directory of a single entry
244 Read value or attribute of a single entry
245 General interrogation of generic data
248 Write entry
249 Write entry with confirmation
250 Write entry with e xecution
251 Write entry abort
 Generic functions in monitor direction
INF Semantics
240 Read headings of all defined groups
241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry
244 Read value or attribute of a single entry
245 End of general interrogation of generic data
249 Write entry with confirmation
250 Write entry with e xecution
251 Write entry aborted
10.3.9 Disturbance Records
This relay can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault detector or an
operation of the relay can make the relay store the disturbance records.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in the standard of IEC60870-5-103.
10.4 IEC61850 Interface
10.4.1 Overview
The IEC61850 software module of PCS-9000 series is adopted in the device. The IEC61850
standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic equipment to
produce standardized communication systems. The IEC61850 is a series of standards describing

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration, testing,

environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC61850-2: Glossary
IEC61850-3: General requirements
IEC61850-4: System and project management
IEC61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations
related to IEDs
IEC61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment -
Principles and models
IEC61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Common data classes
IEC61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment –
Compatible logical node classes and data classes
IEC61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC8802-3
IEC61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multi-drop point to point link
IEC61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC8802-3
IEC61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.4.2 Communication Profiles

The PCS-9600 series relay supports IEC61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-9600 series relay to have an IP address to
establish communications. These addresses are located in the submenu “Comm Settings”, see
Section 7.6 for further details.
MMS Protocol
IEC61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
Client/server

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay controllers.
Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication
object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gate ways are considered as
servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients.
Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is the number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC61850-5 and IEC61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication
system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV
connection relationship amongst IEDs.
10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS
Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.
1. Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
“false”.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true
Report Control Block Report Control Block

IED (Server) IED (Server)
Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link MMS Link
Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
2. Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true

TCP Link MMS Link Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.
NOTICE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be
the same. For example, if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is
198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is
198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2,
i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258,
Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.
3. Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2
RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = false RptEna = true

TCP Link MMS Link
Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual -net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.4.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one logical
device, and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD contains
information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information about the
IED logical device.
10.4.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-9600 series relays to provide access to digital
status points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality
flags. The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO p rovides digital
status points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital
status values from the PCS-9600 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.4.4.2 Analog Values
Most of the analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from an IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
provides data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog
data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the
corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
MMXU.MX.TotW: three-phase active power

MMXU.MX.TotVAr: three-phase reactive power
MMXU.MX.TotPF: three-phase power factor
MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle
MMXU.MX.A.neut: ground current magnitude and angle
10.4.4.3 Protection Logical Node s
The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-9600 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
PDIF: transformer instantaneous differential, transformer percent differential

PDIS: phase distance, ground distance
PIOC: phase instantaneous overcurrent, neutral instantaneous overcurrent, ground
instantaneous overcurrent, negative-sequence instantaneous overcurrent.
PTOC: phase time overcurrent, neutral time overcurrent, ground time overcurrent,
negative-sequence time overcurrent, neutral directional overcurrent,
negative-sequence directional overcurrent
PTUV: phase undervoltage, auxiliary undervoltage, third harmonic neutral undervoltage
PTUF: underfrequency
PTOV: phase overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, auxiliary overvoltage, negative sequence
overvoltage
RBRF: breaker failure
RREC: autoreclosure
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general” in a PCS-9600 series relay. The operate flag for PTOC1 is
“PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For the PCS-9600 series relay protection elements, these flags take their
values from related module for the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
protection trip information is reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.4.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN sha ll be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. In PCS-9600 series relays, most of the public services, the
common settings, control values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The
public services may be BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the
whole device; the common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system
settings and some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more
protection elements (logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item
indicates the local operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control
commands to the IED will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is
changed to false. Besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:
MMUX: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands
such as RMS values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage
and current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as
power flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The
requested accuracy for these functions has to be provided.
LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be
combined to a new “operate” of PTRC.
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output re fers to
the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power
System” (IEC60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording,
independently of the trigger mode.
GAPC: Generic automatic process control, it is used to model in a generic way the
processing/automation of functions, for example the sequence control functions for
PCS-9600 series relays.
CSWI: Switch controller. This class is used to control all switching conditions of XCBR and
XSWI. A remote switching command (for example select-before-operate) arrives here
firstly.
XCBR: Breaker control. The XCBR logical node is directly associated with the breaker control
feature.
XCBR1.ST.Pos: This is the position of the breaker. If the breaker control logic
indicates that the breaker, or any single pole of the breaker, is
closed, then the breaker position state is “on”. If the breaker
control logic indicates that the breaker is open, then the breaker
position state is “off”.
XCBR1.ST.BlkOpn: This is the state of the block open command logic. When true,
breaker open commands from IEC61850 clients will be rejected.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
XCBR1.ST.BlkCls: This is the state of the block close command logic. When true,
breaker close commands from IEC61850 clients will be rejected.
XCBR1.CO.Pos: This is where IEC61850 clients can issue open or close
commands to the breaker. SBO control with normal enhanced
security is the only supported IEC61850 control model.
10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration
10.4.5.1 Buffered/Unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
TrgOps: Trigger options. The following bits are supported by the PCS-9600 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
OptFlds: Option Fields. The following bits are supported by the PCS-9600 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
IntgPd: Integrity period.
BufTm: Buffer time.
10.4.5.2 File Transfer
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-9600 series relay.
10.4.5.3 Timestamps
The universal time coordinated (UTC) timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
represent the time of the last change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.4.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of: a five or six-character name prefix; a four-character standard name (for
example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.); a one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.
10.4.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link
settings in device.
The PCS-9600 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a da taset.
It is this dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset
is configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between the PCS-9600 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
The general steps required for transmission configuration are:
1. Configure the data.
2. Configure the transmission dataset.
3. Configure the GOOSE service settings.
The general steps required for reception configuration are:
1. Configure the data.
2. Configure the reception dataset.
3. Configure the GOOSE service settings.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.4.6 ACSI Conformance
10.4.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-9600 Series

Client-Server Roles
Server side (of Two-party
B11 － C1 Y
Application-Association)
Client side (of Two-party
B12 C1 － N
Application-Association)
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y Y Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used Y N Y
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be “M” if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-9600 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-9600 series relays
10.4.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-9600 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y Y
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be “M” if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be “M” if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be “M” if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models
has been declared
C5: Shall be “M” if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-9600 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-9600 series relays
10.4.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Services Server/Publisher PCS-9600 Series

Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O
S14 CreateDataSet O
S15 DeleteDataSet O
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report C6 Y
S24-1 data-change Y
S24-2 qchg-change Y
S24-3 data-update Y
S25 GetBRCBValues C6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues C6 Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report C6 Y
S27-1 data-change Y
S27-2 qchg-change Y
S27-3 data-update Y
S28 GetURCBValues C6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues C6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
S31 SetLCBValues O
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O
S33 QueryLogAfter O
S34 GetLogStatusValues O
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage C8 Y
S36 GetGoReference C9
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber C9 Y
S38 GetGoCBValues O Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess O
Transmission Of Sample Value Model (SVC)
Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage C10
S46 GetMSVCBValues O
S47 SetMSVCBValues O
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage C10
S49 GetUSVCBValues O
S50 SetUSVCBValues O
Control
S51 Select O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O Y
S59 DeleteFile O
S60 GetFileAttribute Values M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y
Where:
C6: Shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)

C7: Shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter)
C8: Shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
C9: Shall declare support if TP association is available
C10: Shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.4.7 Logical Nodes
10.4.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
The PCS-9600 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
NOTICE!
The actual instantiation of each logical node is respectively determined by an actual

product of the PCS-9600 series relays.
Nodes PCS-9600 Series

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Ph ysical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential YES
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance YES
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency YES
PHAR: Harmonic restraint YES
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent YES
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency YES
PTOV: Overvoltage YES
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload YES
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage YES
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency YES
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element YES
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking YES
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller YES
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archi ving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements YES
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics YES
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic YES
MMTR: Metering YES
MMXN: Non phase related measurement YES
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance YES
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
T: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer YES
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Th yristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.5 DNP3.0 Interface
10.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.5.2 Link Layer Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.5.3 Transport Functions
Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.5.4 Application Layer Functions
10.5.4.1 Function Code
Function Code Function

0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
5 (0x05) Direct Operate
6 (0x06) Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
13 (0x0D) Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement
10.5.4.2 Supported Object List
The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION Master may issue Master shall parse
Outstation shall parse Outstation may issue
Group Variation Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description
Number Number Code (DEC) Code (HEX) Code (DEC) Code (HEX)
1
00, 01
(read)
Binary Input: (start, stop)
1 0 22
An y Variation 06
(assign
(no range, or all)
class)
00, 01
Binary Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
1 1
Packed format (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Binary Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
1 2
With flags (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
06
Binary Input Event: 1 (no range, or all)
2 0
An y Variation (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
06 129
Binary Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17, 28
2 1
Without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
(limited qty) (unsol. resp)
06 129
2 2
With absolute time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
06 129
2 3
With relative time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
00, 01
Binary output: 1 (start, stop)
10 0
An y Variation (read) 06
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Binary output: 1 (start, stop)
10 0
An y Variation (read) 06
(no range, or all)
Binary output: 2 00, 01
10 1
Packed format (write) (start, stop)
3
(select)
4 17, 28 129 echo of
Binary Command:
(operate) (index) (response) request
Control relay output
12 1 5
block
(direct op)
(CROB)
6
17, 28
(dir. op, no
(index)
ack)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
1
00, 01
(read)
Analog Input: (start, stop)
30 0 22
An y Variation 06
(assign
(no range, or all)
class)
00, 01
Analog Input: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
30 1
32-bit with flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 2
16-bit with flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 3
32-bit without flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
30 4
16-bit without flag (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Analog Input:
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
30 5 Single-prec flt-pt
(read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
with flag
(no range, or all)
06
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all)
32 0
An y Variation (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
06 129
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 1
32-bit without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)
06 129
Analog Input Event: 1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 2
16-bit without time (read) 07, 08 130 (index)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
06 129
Analog Input Event:
1 (no range, or all) (response) 17,28
32 5 Single-prec flt-pt
(read) 07, 08 130 (index)
without time
00, 01
Analog Input
1 (start, stop)
34 0 Deadband:
(read) 06
An y Variation
(no range, or all)
00, 01
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
Analog Input
(no range, or all)
34 1 Deadband:
00, 01
16-bit
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17,28
(index)
00, 01
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
Analog Input
(no range, or all)
34 2 Deadband:
00, 01
32-bit
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17, 28
(index)
00, 01
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
Analog Input
(no range, or all)
34 3 Deadband:
00, 01
Single-prec flt-pt
2 (start, stop)
(write) 17, 28
(index)
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop)
40 0 Status:
(read) 06
An y Variation
(no range, or all)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 1 Status:
32-bit with flag
(no range, or all)
00, 01
Analog Output
1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 2 Status:
16-bit with flag
(no range, or all)
Analog Output 00, 01
Status: 1 (start, stop) 129 00, 01
40 3
single-prec flt-pt with (read) 06 (response) (start, stop)
flag (no range, or all)
3
(select)
4 17, 28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 1 5
32-bit
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)
3
(select)
4 17,28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 2 5
16-bit
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)
3
(select)
4 17,28 129 echo of
Analog Output:
41 3 5
Single-prec ft-pt
(direct op)
6
17, 28
(dir. Op, no
(index)
ack)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
07
1 07 129
(limited
Time and Data: (read) (limited qty = 1) (response)
50 1 qty = 1)
Absolute time
2 07
(write) (limited qty = 1)
Time and Data:
2 07
50 3 Absolute time at last
(write) (limited qty = 1)
recorded time
129
Time and Data CTO: 07
(response)
51 1 Absolute time, (limited
130
synchronized qty = 1)
(unsol. resp)
129
Time and Data CTO: 07
(response)
51 2 Absolute time, (limited
130
unsynchronized qty = 1)
(unsol. resp)
1
(read)
Class Objects: 06
60 1 22
Class 0 data (no range, or all)
(assign
class)
06
1 (no range, or all)
(read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
20
(enable
Class Objects:
60 2 unsol.)
Class 1 data
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
06
Class Objects: 1 (no range, or all)
60 3
Class 2 data (read) 07, 08
(limited qty)

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
REQUEST RESPONSE
Description
20
(enable
unsol.)
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
06
1 (no range, or all)
(read) 07, 08
(limited qty)
20
(enable
Class Objects :
60 4 unsol.)
Class 3 data
21
06
(disable
(no range, or all)
unsol.)
22
(assign
class)
10.5.4.3 Communication Table Configuration
This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user -defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.5.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.
10.5.4.5 Binary Output Configuration
The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point Pulse On/Null Pulse On/Close Pulse On/Trip Latch On/Null Latch Off/Null
Remote Control Not supported Close Trip Close Trip
Logic Link Not supported Set Clear Set Clear
Extended Output See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high-level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On-time” in the related
“Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On-time” is set as “0”, the default
pulse width is 500ms.
10.5.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the
unsolicited messages are transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” firstly and then
the DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function
Code 20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference
value of the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit
unsolicited messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it
should forbid this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages through “Function Code 21” (Disable
Unsolicited Messages).
10.5.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).
10.6 ModBus Interface
The ModBus protocol is a master/slaver communication protocol, and this device is severed as a
slaver in this system. The detailed information about the Modbus protocol, see the “Modbus
Protocol Reference Guide (PI-MBUS-300 Rev.J)”.

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
The ModBus protocol in this device has following definition.
 Physical layer configuration: 1 start-bit, 8 data-bit, 1 stop-bit, no check.
 Linker layer configuration: RTU communication mode, ASCII code not supported.
 Frame length limit: Maximum 256 bytes.
 Frame word definition: first MSB, later LSB.
 Support Ethernet communication, and the net port number is 502.
10.6.1 Binary State Communication
The functional code is 02H (Read Input Status). The binary state includes protection element state,
device operation state, alarm information state and binary input state.
10.6.2 Analog Data Communication

The functional code is 04H (Read Input Registers). The analog data include measurement values,
phase angle data and harmonic measurement values.
10.6.3 Settings Communication

The functional code is 03H (Read Holding Registers). The settings include communication settings,
system settings and protection settings.
10.6.4 Remote Control
The functional code is 05H (Force Single Coil).
Register Address Relevant Operation

0000H Close (0xFF00); Trip (0x0000)
1000H Reset (0xFF00)
10.6.5 Remote Regulation
The functional code is 06H (Preset Single Register).
10.6.6 Diagnostics Information
The functional code is 08H (Diagnostics).
Function Code Semantics

00H Return query data
01H Restart communication option
04H Force listen only mode
0BH Return bus message count
0CH Return bus communication error count
0DH Return bus exception error count
0EH Return slave message count
0FH Return slave no response count

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication
10.6.7 Download Settings
The functional codes are 06H (Preset Single Register) and 10H (Preset Multiple Registers). Only
the protection settings can be modified in this protocol.
10.6.8 Abnormal Information

If this device receives an unidentified message, this device will reply an abnormal information
message to the master device.
Abnormality Code Semantics

01H Invalid functional code
02H Invalid register address
03H Illegal data value
04H Slave device failure

Date: 2015-12-01
10 Communication

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11.1 General .......................................................................................................................11-1

11.2 Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................11-1
11.3 Checking the Shipment..........................................................................................11-2

11.4 Material and Tools Required .................................................................................11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions ........................................................11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ..........................................................................................11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring.........................................................................11-4
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines....................................................................................................11-4
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ........................................................................................................11-4
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device.................................................................................11-5
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ...........................................................................11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring .....................................................................................................11-6
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...........................................................................................11-7
11.8 Typical Wiring of the Relay ...................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of this relay and the cut-out in the cubicle (unit: mm) .............11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot ..................11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system..............................................................................11-5
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay..........................................................................11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination .........................................................................11-6
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables...................................11-7
Figure 11.8-1 Control panel (button, switch and link) of the cubicle ..................................11-7
Figure 11.8-2 Typical wiring diagram of this relay ...............................................................11-8

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
11.1 General
The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.
11.2 Safety Instructions
Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when ha ndling the
equipment.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the power supply module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
NOTICE!
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.

Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
NOTICE!
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the Chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Checking the Shipment
Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Section 2.1.3.
11.4 Material and Tools Required
The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high levels of humidity, surge voltages of

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
high amplitude and short rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.
3. Air must be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
11.6 Mechanical Installation
This relay is made of a single layer 4U height 9.5" chassis with 8 connectors on its rear panel (See
Figure 6.1-4). The following figure shows the dimensions of this relay for reference in mounting.
(264.0) (195.5)
(246.4)
101.6
177.0
246.4±0.1
+0.4
228.0 -0.0
4-Φ6.8
+0.4
179.0 -0.0
101.6±0.1
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of this rela y and the cut-out in the cubicle (unit: mm)
NOTICE!
It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for
heat emission of this relay.
As mentioned in Chapter 6, up to eight modules are installed in the enclosure of this relay, and
these modules must be plugged into the proper slots of this relay respectively. The safety

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for the details.
Figure 11.6-2 shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-2 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
NOTICE!
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non -corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as larg e as possible.
NOTICE!
For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2), and the ground braided copper
strip can be connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible.
The main thing is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit
are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2
 Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: stranded conductor, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2
 AC voltage inputs: stranded conductor, 1.5mm2
 AC current inputs: stranded conductor, 2.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm2. If the 4.0mm2 lead is selected, only
the dedicated terminal cable lug provided by NR can be adopted.

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
 Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter 6 for further details
about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.
01 02
Tighten
03 04
05 06
01
07 08
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables
DANGER!
NEVER allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage.
11.8 Typical Wiring of the Relay
Relevant information and sections about the modules and the connectors of the relay are
described in Chapter 6. Referring the relevant sections can help to wire correctly and effectively.
The following figure shows the metallic links, control switch and local operation buttons (manual
closing button and manual tripping button) on the control panel.
Local Remote
Protection Protection Remote Remote
Tripping Closing Tripping Closing
Close
Trip
Figure 11.8-1 Control panel (button, switch and link) of the cubicle

Date: 2015-12-01
11 Installation
The typical wiring of this relay is shown as below, all the configurable binary inputs and binary
output adopt the default definition in the factory.
Circuit Breaker
A
05 06 01 02 03 04 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Ux Uxn Ua Ub Uc Un Ia Ian Ib Ibn Ic Icn I0 I0n I0s I0sn Iam Iamn Ibm Ibmn Icm Icmn
For Protection For Metering

Voltage Inputs
Current Inputs
NR4412
BI_01+ 01
Ethernet 1
BI_01- 02
BI_02+ 03
Ethernet 3
Ground at BI_02- 04
Remote
device BI_03 05
Ethernet 2
BI_04 06
01 BI_05 07
02 A BI_06 08
03 B BI_07 09
04 SGND BI_08 10
NR4106
NR4503
05 BI_09 11
06 A BI_10 12
07 B BI_11 13
08 SGND BI_12 14
09 BI_13 15
10 SYN+ BI_14 16
11 SYN- BI_15 17
12 SGND BI_16 18
13 BI_17 19
14 RTS BI_18 20
15 TXD BI_19 21
16 SGND BI_Opto- 22
01 SIG_COM 01
BO_01
02 BO_Alm_Fail TX 02
03 BO_Alm_Abnor 03
BO_02
04 04
BO_01 RX
05 05
BO_03
06 06
BO_02
07 07
BO_04
08 08
BO_03
09 09
BO_05
10 10
NR4304
NR4202
NR4521
BO_04
11 11
BO_06
12 12
BO_05
13 13
BO_07
14 14
BO_06
15 15
BO_08
16 16
BO_07
17 17
BO_09
18 18
BO_08
19 19
BO_10
Power 20 PSW+ 20
Supply 21 PSW- 21
BO_11
22 GND 22
Figure 11.8-2 Typical wiring diagram of this relay

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Safety Instructions ................................................................................................. 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ................................................................................................. 12-2

12.4 Setting Familiarization .......................................................................................... 12-2
12.5 Product Checks....................................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized ....................................................................................... 12-4
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized............................................................................................. 12-5
12.5.3 Protective Function Test............................................................................................... 12-8
12.5.4 On-load Checks ......................................................................................................... 12-16

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
12.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current

leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. The personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the technical data (Chapter 2) must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
12.3 Commission Tools
Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0 ~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
 PCS-9600 serials relay dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter 8.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate pas sword to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-Explorer or PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display
a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily,
saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC
software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first t ime, allow sufficient time

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
to become familiar with its operation.
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This cou ld be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by self -monitoring when the
power supply is energized.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software -based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Metering and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following listed items are
necessary.
 Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
 Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipment on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
 DC power supply
 Optic-isolated binary inputs
 Binary output contacts
 Electrical communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Section 2.1.1.1, before
energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Section 2.1.1.1. See this section
for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING!
Energize this relay only when the power supply is within the specified operating ranges
in Section 2.1.1.1.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
The liquid crystal display (LCD) is designed to operate in a wide range of substation ambient

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
temperatures. For this purpose, this relay has an automatic “LCD contrast” adjusting feature,
which is capable to adjust LCD contrast automatically according to the ambient temperature.
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. Afte r being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the
relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate
when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.
It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.
12.5.2.4 Test the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We need to
emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that this device
finds serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter 4, the “ALARM ” LED will light in yellow.
When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM ” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Test the Other LEDs
Test the other LEDs according to the configuration of the LEDs (through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software). If the conditions which can turn on the selected LED are
satisfied, the selected LED will be on.
12.5.2.6 Test the AC Current Inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply current equal to the current transformer secondary winding rating to each current

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, see the following table or external connection
diagram for appropriate terminal numbers, checking its magnitu de using a multimeter/test set
readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The current measurement accuracy of the relay is ±2.5%. However an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Current channel linearity and precision checkout
Item Practical Input Measurement (on LCD) Error

Ia
Ib
Ic
I0
I0s
12.5.2.7 Test the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The voltage measurement accuracy of the relay is ±0.5%. However an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Voltage channel linearity and precision checkout
Item Practical Input Measurement (on LCD) Error

Ua
Ub
Uc
Ux
12.5.2.8 Test the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the relay are functioning correctly. The binary inputs
should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using the submenu “Contact Inputs” and “Prot
Inputs”.
Binary inputs testing checkout
BI Name State without energized State with energized Correct?

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
12.5.3 Protective Function Test

The setting checks ensure that the entire application-specific relay, for the particular installation,
has been correctly applied to the relay.
NOTICE!
The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.3.1 Demonstrate correct protection operation
The above tests have already demonstrated that the protection is within calibration, thus the
purpose of these tests is as follows:
 To conclude that the primary function of the protection can trip according to the correct
application settings.
 To verify correct setting of all related protective elements.
12.5.3.2 Differential Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 current differential protection function in the No.1 setting group,
demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application-specific settings.
1. Enable the stage 1 differential protection.
 Set the setting [FO.En] as “1” in the submenu “Diff Settings”.
 Set the setting [87L.En] as “1” in the submenu “Diff Settings”.
 Set the setting [87L.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “Diff Settings”.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “Diff Settings”.
 Set the setting [FO.LocID] as same as [FO.RmtID] in the submenu “Diff Settings”.
2. De-energize all the binary inputs of this relay.
3. Connect the FO Channel module “TX” and “RX” together by an optic fiber (self-circle).
4. Simulate a normal condition with a very small phase currents to make the fault detector of the
differential protection not pick up.
5. Simulate a single-phase internal fault. The fault phase current is great enough to make the
fault detector of the differential protection pick up (see Section 3.3.2) and make the differential
conditions be satisfied (see Section 3.3.3).
6. The stage 1 differential protection will operate and issue the trip command. The “ TRIP” LED
indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the LCD.
7. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 differential protection
automatically. Restore the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD manually.
12.5.3.3 Overcurrent Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 overcurrent protection function in the No.1 setting group,
1. Enable the stage 1 overcurrent protection with VCE and directional element control.
 Set the setting [50/51P1.Opt_Curve] as “0” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [50/51P1.En] as “1” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [50/51P1.En_VCE] as “1” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
 Set the setting [50/51P1.Opt_Dir] as “1” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
 Set the setting [50/51P1.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “OC Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages and currents.
4. Simulate a single-phase fault or multi-phase fault, the current of the fault phase is 1.05 ×
[50/51P1.I_Set], and the protection voltages satisfy the VCE condition (see Section 3.4.3) and
forward directional control condition (see Section 3.4.4).
5. After the period of [50/51P1.t_Op], the stage 1 overcurrent protection will operate and issue
the trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the
LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 overcurrent protection

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
12.5.3.4 IDMT Overcurrent Protection Check
This check, performed the IDMT overcurrent protection function with very inverse curve in No.1
setting group, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application -specific settings.
1. Enable the IDMT overcurrent protection.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages and currents.
4. Simulate a single-phase fault or multi-phase fault, and the current of the fault phase is 2 ×
[50/51P1.I_Set].
5. After the period of 13.5 × [50/51P1.TMS] × [50/51P1.t_Op], the IDMT overcurrent protection
will operate and issue the trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant
report will be shown on the LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the IDMT protection automatically. Restore
the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD manually.
NOTICE!
The IDMT overcurrent protection with other characteristic inverse curves can be
checked through the same method. Note to set the relevant characteristic and logic
settings correctly.
12.5.3.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection function in the No.1
setting group, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the app lication-specific settings.
1. Enable the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection.
 Set the setting [50/51G1.Opt_Curve] as “0” in the submenu “EF Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [50/51G1.En] as “1” in the submenu “EF Settings”.
 Set the setting [50/51G1.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “EF Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “EF Settings”.
 Set the setting [Opt_3I0] as “0” in the submenu “System Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition, the external input current of the zero sequence CT is less than
0.95 × [50/51G1.3I0_Set].

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
4. Simulate a single-phase earth fault, the external input current of the zero sequence CT is
greater than 1.05 × [50/51G1.3I0_Set].
5. After the period of [50/51G1.t_Op], the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent protection will
operate and issue the trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report
will be shown on the LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 zero sequence overcurrent
protection automatically. Restore the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD manually.
NOTICE!
Another way for testing the zero sequence overcurrent protection is using the
self-calculated zero sequence current.
12.5.3.6 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection function in the No.1 setting
group, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application -specific settings.
1. Enable the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection.
 Set the logic setting [50/51SEF1.En] as “1” in the submenu “SEF Settings”.
 Set the setting [50/51SEF1.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “SEF Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “SEF Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition, the external input current of the sensitive zero sequence CT is
less than 0.95 × [50/51SEF1.3I0_Set].
4. Simulate a single-phase earth fault, the external input current of the zero sequence CT is
greater than 1.05 × [50/51SEF1.3I0_Set].
5. After the period of [50/51SEF1.t_Op], the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection will operate
and issue the trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be
shown on the LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 sensitive earth fault protection
12.5.3.7 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection function in the No.1
setting group, demonstrates that the relay is operating correctly at the application -specific settings.
1. Enable the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection.
 Set the setting [50/51Q1.Opt_Curve] as “0” in the submenu “NegOC Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [50/51Q1.En] as “1” in the submenu “NegOC Settings”.
 Set the setting [50/51Q1.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “NegOC Settings”.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “NegOC Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition; the negative sequence current is less than 0.95 ×
[50/51Q1.I2_Set].
4. Simulate an unbalance fault; the negative sequence current is greater than 1.05 ×
[50/51Q1.I2_Set].
5. After the period of [50/51Q1.t_Op], the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent protection will
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 negative sequence overcurrent
protection automatically. Restore the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD manually.
12.5.3.8 Thermal Overload Protection Check
This check, performed the thermal overload protection function in No.1 setting group,
1. Enable the definite time overload protection.
 Set the logic setting [49.En_Trp] as “1” in the submenu “ThOvLd Settings”.
 Set the setting [49.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “ThOvLd Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “ThOvLd Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages and currents, and the load
current is 0.5 × [49.K_Trp] × [49.Ib_Set].
4. Simulate a thermal overload condition; the load current is 2 × [49.K_Trp] × [49.Ib_Set].
5. After the period of about 0.223 × [49.Tau], the definite time overload protection will operate
and issue the trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be
shown on the LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the thermal overload protection
12.5.3.9 Undervoltage Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 undervoltage protection function in the No.1 setting group,
1. Enable the stage 1 undervoltage protection.
 Set the logic setting [27P1.En] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set the setting [27P.Opt_1P/3P] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
 Set the setting [27P.Opt_Up/Upp] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set the setting [27P.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages and the circuit breaker is closed .
4. Simulate an undervoltage condition; anyone of the three phase-to-phase voltages is less than
0.95 × [27P1.U_Set].
5. After the period of [27P1.t_Op], the stage 1 undervoltage protection will operate and issue the
trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the
LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 undervoltage protection
12.5.3.10 Overvoltage Protection Check
This check, performed the stage 1 overvoltage protection function in the No.1 setting group,
1. Enable the stage 1 overvoltage protection.
 Set the logic setting [59P1.En] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set the setting [59P.Opt_1P/3P] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set the setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp] as “1” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set the setting [59P.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “VoltProt Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages.
4. Simulate an overvoltage condition; anyone of the three phase-to-phase voltages is greater

than 1.05 × [59P1.U_Set].
5. After the period of [59P1.t_Op], the stage 1 overvoltage protection will operate and issue the
trip command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the
LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the stage 1 overvoltage protection
12.5.3.11 Broken Conductor Protection Check
This check, performed the broken conductor protection function in the No.1 setting group,

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
1. Enable the broken conductor protection.
 Set the logic setting [50BC.En] as “1” in the submenu “BrknCond Settings”.
 Set the setting [50BC.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “BrknCond Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “BrknCond Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal currents.
4. Simulate a broken conductor condition; the ratio I2/I1 is greater than 1.05 × [50BC.I2/I1_Set].
5. After the period of [50BC.t_Op], the broken conductor protection will operate and issue the trip
command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the LCD.
6. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the broken conductor protection
12.5.3.12 Breaker Failure Protection Check
This check, performed the breaker failure protection function in the No.1 setting group,
There are many protective elements can initiate the breaker failure protection. Here, all the check
is based on the assumption that the stage 1 overcurrent protection is operated.
1. Enable the stage 1 breaker failure protection and the stage 1 overcurrent protection.
 Set the logic setting [50BF.En] as “1” in the submenu “BFP Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] as “1” in the submenu “BFP Settings”.
 Set the setting [50BF.Opt_LogicMode] as “0” in the submenu “BFP Settings”.
 Set the setting [50BF.OutMap] as “0x0004” in the submenu “BFP Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “BFP Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal currents and the circuit breaker is closed.
4. Make the stage 1 overcurrent protection operate according the method which is described in

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
Section 12.5.3.3.
5. Make the fault phase current is greater than 1.05 × [50BF.I_Set] and the circuit breaker is
closed.
6. After the period of [50BF.t_ReTrp], the breaker failure protection will operate and issue the
re-trip command; and after the period of [50BF.t_Op], the breaker failure protection will
7. After the fault is disappeared, this relay will restore the breaker failure protection automatically.
Restore the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD manually.
12.5.3.13 Mechanical Protection Check
This check, performed the No.1 mechanical protection function in the No.1 setting group,
1. Enable the No.1 mechanical protection.
 Set the logic setting [MR1.En] as “1” in the submenu “MR Prot Settings”.
 Set the setting [MR1.OutMap] as “0x0001” in the submenu “MR Prot Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “MR Prot Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition without any signal of mechanical protection.
4. Energized the binary input which is defined as the input of the No.1 mechanical protection .
5. After the period of [MR1.t_Op], the No.1 mechanical protection will operate and issue the trip
command. The “TRIP” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the LCD.
6. After the signal of the No.1 mechanical protection is disappeared, this relay will restore the
No.1 mechanical protection automatically. Restore the “TRIP” indicator and the LCD
manually.
12.5.3.14 Auto-recloser Check
This check, performed the auto-reclosing with synchronism check function in No.1 setting group,
There are many protective elements can make the auto-recloser operate. Here, all the check is
based on the assumption that the stage 1 overcurrent protection is operated.
1. Enable the stage 1 overcurrent protection and auto-recloser of this relay.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
 Set the logic setting [79.En] as “1” in the submenu “AR Settings”.
 Set the logic setting [79.En_SynChk] as “1” in the submenu “AR Settings”.
 Set the setting [79.N_Rcls] as “1” in the submenu “AR Settings”.
 Set other logic settings as “0” in the submenu “AR Settings”.
 Set the setting [79.OutMap] as “0x0002” in the submenu “AR Settings”.
3. Simulate a normal condition with normal protection voltages, currents and synchro-check
voltage, and the circuit breaker is closed. After a period of time delay, the auto-recloser is
ready and in service. A full charged battery sign is shown on the right bottom of the LCD.
4. Make the stage 1 overcurrent protection operate according the method which is described in
Section 12.5.3.3.
5. Just at the same time when the stage 1 overcurrent protection is operated, simulate a normal
condition with normal voltage inputs (protection and synchro-check) and without current
inputs, and the circuit breaker is opened. After the period of [79.t_3PS1], the auto-recloser will
operate, the “RECLOSE” LED indicator will be on; a relevant report will be shown on the LCD.
The auto-recloser with other check modes can be checked through the same method. Note to set
the relevant logic settings as “1”. For the details about the auto-recloser theory, see Section 3.13.
12.5.4 On-load Checks
The objectives of the on-load checks are:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
 Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
 Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.5.4.1 Final Checks
After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just be en maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2015-12-01
12 Commissioning

Date: 2015-12-01
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13.1 Maintenance Schedule .......................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 Regular Testing ....................................................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Failure Tracing and Repair ................................................................................... 13-1

13.4 Replace Failed Modules........................................................................................ 13-1

Date: 2015-12-01
13 Maintenance

Date: 2015-12-01
13 Maintenance
13.1 Maintenance Schedule
It is recommended that products supplied by NR receive periodic monitoring after installation. In

view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to
confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.
This relay is self-supervised and so requires less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most
problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic
tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the extern al wiring is
intact.
13.2 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits which can not be supervised are
binary input, output circuits and human machine interfaces. Therefore regular testing can be
minimized to checking the unsupervised circuits.
13.3 Failure Tracing and Repair
Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the alarm record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the history alarm reports through the HMI.
See Section 8.3.2 for the details of the alarm events.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
 Test circuit connections are correct
 Modules are securely inserted in position
 Correct DC power voltage is applied
 Correct AC inputs are applied
 Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual
13.4 Replace Failed Modules
If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name and hardware type -form as the

Date: 2015-12-01
13 Maintenance
removed module. Furthermore, the replaced module should have the same software version. And
the replaced analog input module and power supply module should have the same ratings.
DANGER!
After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before
the replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.
WARNING!
Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist
band and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the
electronic components could suffer damage. After replacing the main CPU module,
check the settings.

Date: 2015-12-01
Table of Contents
14.1 Decommissioning................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1.1 Switching off ................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1.2 Disconnecting cables ................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.3 Dismantling .................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Disposal .................................................................................................................... 14-1

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01
14.1 Decommissioning
14.1.1 Switching off
To switch off this relay, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
14.1.2 Disconnecting cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the power supply
module of this relay, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power
supply is switched off.
DANGER!
Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CT and VT, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CT and VT is
switched off.
14.1.3 Dismantling
The rack of this relay may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER!
When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
14.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

Date: 2015-12-01

Date: 2015-12-01

In the current version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have
been modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
Beta 1.00 2.10 2013-05-31 Form the original manual.
1. Update the function diagram in Section 1.1.
2. Update the technical data in Section2.1.1, Section 2.1.2
and Section 2.1.4.
3. Update the protection parameters in Section 2.2.
4. Update the logic diagram in Figure 3.3-6.
5. Update the setting ranges in Section 3.6, Section 3.7,
Section 3.9, Section 3.11, Section 3.12, Section 3.14 and
Section 3.15.
6. Update the hardware configuration and module description
in Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.7 and Section 6.8.
1.00 2.00 2.13 2015-01-27
7. Update the setting lists and setting ranges in Section 7.2,
Section 7.3.4, Section 7.3.5, Section 7.3.7, Section 7.3.9
and Section 7.3.11.
8. Update the menu items in Section 8.2.6 and update the
LCD display figures in Section 8.2.9.
9. Update the fault information in Section 8.3.1.
10. Update the configurable LED indicators in Section 9.3.3
and update the configurable binary outputs Section 9.3.5.
11. Update the dimensions in Section 11.6 and update the
typical wiring diagram in Section 11.8.
1. Update the environmental/facility safety signs and product
safety labels.
2. Update the function diagram in Section 1.1.
3. Update the communication description in Section 1.3.
4. Update the electrical specification in Section 2.1.1.
5. Update the mechanical specifications in Section 2.1.2.
2.00 3.00 3.00 2015-12-01 6. Update the communication interface parameters in Section
2.1.4.1 and Section 2.1.4.2.
7. Update the type test specifications in Section 2.1.5.
8. Add SEF protection parameters in Section 2.2.
9. Add SEF fault protection in Chapter 3.
10. Update the main CPU module description in Section 6.1
and Section 6.5.

Date: 2015-12-01
11. Update the terminal definition and connection example of

the analog module in Section 6.6.
12. Update the system settings in Section 7.2.
13. Add the SEF protection settings in Section 7.3.
14. Update the setting list in Section 7.6.1 and Section 7.6.2.
15. Update the menus in Section 8.2.2 and Section 8.2.6.
16. Add the SEF protection related information in Section 8.2.6
and Section 8.3.
2.00 3.00 3.00 2015-12-01
17. Add the SEF protection related information in Section 9.3.1
and Section 9.3.2.
18. Add a new Section 10.2.6 about ModBus communication.
19. Add a new Section 10.6 about ModBus protocol.
20. Update the DNP3.0 protocol in Section 10.5.
21. Update the wiring guidelines in Section 11.7.5.
22. Add the commissioning steps of the SEF protection in
Section 12.3.5.

Date: 2015-12-01

PCS-9613 X Instruction+Manual EN Overseas+General X R3.00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-9613 X Instruction+Manual EN Overseas+General X R3.00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCS-9613

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

PCS-9613 Differential Relay I

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

II PCS-9613 Differential Relay

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

Input signal of a function block, such as a logic setting, a blocking

Input inversion signal of a function block, such as a logic setting,

S Q RS flipflop (static memory): setting input (S), resetting input (R),

PCS-9613 Differential Relay III

Junction (connection point)

Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

P/N: ZL_PCS-9613_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R3.00

IV PCS-9613 Differential Relay

The chapter contents are summarized as below:

8 Human Machine Interface

PCS-9613 Differential Relay V

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

VI PCS-9613 Differential Relay

Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613....................................................................... 1-1

PCS-9613 Differential Relay 1-a

1-b PCS-9613 Differential Relay

The function diagram of this relay is shown in Figure 1.1-1.

50P 51P 67P 46 46BC 50BF CTS

50G 51G 67G 87L MR

51SG 67SG FDR

Figure 1.1-1 Functional diagram of PCS-9613

PCS-9613 Differential Relay 1-1

1-2 PCS-9613 Differential Relay

64 protection operation reports

 Auxiliary testing functions

Auxiliary Testing Functions

PCS-9613 Differential Relay 1-3

1-4 PCS-9613 Differential Relay

2.1 General Specification .................................................................................................2-1

2.1.2 Mechanical Specifications ................................................................................................ 2-2

2.1.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................. 2-2

2.1.4 Communication Interfaces ............................................................................................... 2-3

2.1.5 Type Test ......................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.2 Protective Functions...................................................................................................2-5

2.2.2 Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................................................... 2-6

2.2.3 IDMT Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................................... 2-6

2.2.4 Thermal Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 2-6

2.2.5 Zero Sequence Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................ 2-7

2.2.6 Zero Sequence IDMT Overcurrent Protection................................................................... 2-7

2.2.7 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ....................................................................................... 2-7

2.2.8 Sensitive Earth Fault Directional Element ........................................................................ 2-7

2.2.9 Sensitive Earth Fault IDMT Protection.............................................................................. 2-8

2.2.10 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection ................................................................... 2-8

2.2.11 Broken Conductor Protection ......................................................................................... 2-8

2.2.12 Breaker Failure Protection ............................................................................................. 2-8